Skip to main content

Full text of "Line : an art study"

See other formats


GO 


CD; 


cni 

00  = 
CDj 

CD  I 


LINE 


MARIE,  MARAT,  AND  THE  FLEUR  DE  LYS 

A  study  in  the  symbolic  use  of  line,  with  an  endeavour  to  maintain 
a  judicious  balance  between  realism  and  idealism. 


LINE 


AN  ART  STUDY 

BY 

EDMUND  J.  SULLIVAN 

Author  of 
"  THE  ART  OF  ILLUSTRATION  "  ; 

Illustrator  of 

"SARTOR  RESARTUS,"  "THE  FRENCH 
REVOLUTION,"  "OMAR  KHAYYAM,"  "THE 
KAISER'S  GARLA.4D,"  Etc. 


e^<9 

Vspy 
! 


13  3*. 


-  6>    33 


LONDON 

CHAPMAN    &    HALL,    LTD 

1922 


PRINTED    IN    GREAT    BRITAIN    sf 

RICHARD  CLAY  &  SONS,  LIMITED, 

BUNGAV,  SUFFOLK. 


IN    MEMORY   OF   MY   FATHER 

SULLIVAN    OF  -HASTINGS" 
(1875—1914) 

SOMETIME    PRESIDENT    OF 
THE    SOCIETY   OF   ART   MASTERS 


%  INTRODUCTION 

THERE  have  been  times  when  I  wished  that  I  had 
not  undertaken  to  write  this  book.  At  first  it  appeared 
(and  of  course  should  remain)  so  simple  an  affair  to 
explain  what  seemed  like  a  discovery, — that  all  drawing 
resolves  itself  into  the  combination  at  various  angles  of 
units  of  straight  line,  consisting  of  two  dots,  that  all 
should  be  plain  sailing. 

All  drawing  is  nothing  more  than  that — the  combina- 
tion of  straight  lilies  into  curves,  which  I  had  been 
combining  nearly  all  my  life — not  quite  unconsciously 
as  the  bourgeois  gentilhomme  spoke  prose;  but  as  a 
deliberate  and  conscious  artist. 

Having  undertaken  the  book,  in  the  full  belief  that  I 
had  bitten  off  something  well  within  my  powers  to 
swallow,  since  such  a  book  has  been  in  mind  for  over 
twenty  years,  the  question  was — "exactly  where  to 
begin." 

Since  the  pointing  out  of  the  simplicity  of  drawing 
was  of  the  essence  of  the  task  there  could  be  no  more 
obvious  answer  than  "  At  the  beginning,  of  course  !  " 
and  forthwith  to  start  writing,  and  go  on  until  the  ink 
ran  out. 

Well,  then,  what  is  the  beginning  of  drawing?  A 
point  ?  If  we  accept  the  definition  of  a  point  as  having 


vili  INTRODUCTION 

position  but  no  magnitude,  we  are  landed  at  once  into 
a  consideration  of  the  infinitely  minute.  But  for  the 
practical  purposes  of  ocular  demonstration  with  which 
drawing  is  concerned,  even  at  its  lowest,  we  must  start 
with  a  visible  dot,  which,  no  matter  how  minute,  has 
magnitude,  diameter  and — has  it? — position.  What  is 
position,  which  is  the  one  quality  allowed  to  an  ideal 
point?  It  is  harder  to  define  than  those  qualities  of 
magnitude  which  the  definition  of  a  point  denies. 
Position  implies  relation  to  something  else,  not  isolation 
in  space.  Position  in  relation  to  what  ?  What  is  measure- 
ment but  an  examination  of  relations?  To  what  are 
we  to  relate  a  point  (which  is  an  intensified  infinity  in 
space)  except  to  infinity  in  the  other — the  extensive — 
direction  ? 

Take  a  line  as  the  trace  of  a  moving  point — let  it  be  a 
straight  line — as  defined — the  shortest  line  between  two 
given  points.  Shortness  is  subject  to  conditions,  and  is 
not  absolute.  To  conceive  two  tangential  ideal  points 
is  impossible. 

Let  the  mind  travel  as  far  forwards  as  it  can  in  its 
conception  of  the  infinitely  remote,  there  is  the  equally 
remote  backwards,  and  to  the  right  and  left  of  the  con- 
ceiving mind.  Of  course  we  come  to  the  unrealized 
paradox  of  the  mathematicians. 

A  straight  line — where  does  it  end  ?  In  two  infinities. 
But  the  paradox  of  infinity  leaves  us  with  a  curious 
nostalgia  for  some  resting-place  in  the  flux. 

To  find  out  for  oneself  and  to  realize  that  at  infinity 
parallel  straight  lines  do  meet — that  therefore  straight 
lines  are  only  parts  of  infinite  circles;  that  space,  so  far 
as  we  can  conceive  it,  is  a  sphere,  and  that  at  that  limit 
of  conception  all  lines  and  spaces  become  but  as  the 


INTRODUCTION  ix 

point  in  the  centre  of  the  next  full-stop  or  the  dot  over 
the  next  small  "  i,"  is  enough  to  make  the  brain  whirl  like 
a  teetotum,  which  has  neither  right  nor  left  hand,  North, 
South,  East,  nor  West — all  becomes  blurred  and  a  giddy 
streak,  as  all  appearance  and  all  external  being,  the 
conscious  and  the  unconscious,  merge  into  one,  as  it 
must  to  the  lulled  criticism  of  a  whirling  Dervish,  when 
h ^himself  becomes  confounded  in  living  atonement  with 
the  infinite  and  the  eternal. 

Once  get  both  eyes  of  the  mind  glued  down  to  a  line 
and  it  becomes  next  to  impossible  to  detach  it.  At  times 
it  is  reduced  to  the  ecstasy  of  the  mesmerized  hen, 
unable  to  lift  its  beak  from  th?  fascination  of  the  chalk- 
mark  stretching  out  to  an  infinity  beyond  the  compre- 
hension of  its  inverted  eyes. 

Let  the  mind  lunge  forward  as  far  as  it  can  with  its 
needle-lance  through  those  terrible  blanks  between  the 
stars  and  beyond  them  all,  it  draws  back  the  point  with 
nothing  impaled  upon  it — unblunted  even  by  the  least 
obstruction.  Yet  it  has  passed  through  something  more 
than  emptiness — has  surely  been  somewhere — though  it 
may  have  nothing  by  which  to  show  that  it  has  been 
as  well  employed  as  in  patching  breeches. 

It  is  out  of  this  mazed  contemplation  that  the  mind 
comes  back  to  its  comic  little  task  of  writing  a  modest 
book  on  drawing,  and  to  explain  that  drawing  is  so  simple 
that  a  child  can  do  it.  To  put  it  forward  as  a  pleasant 
task  for  the  entertainment  of  a  leisure  hour,  more 
fascinating  than  patience,  solitaire,  or  even  bridge. 

If  in  a  train  I  should  see  the  most  unlikely  business- 
man— grocer,  stockbroker,  solicitor — begin  to  fidget  with 
a  pencil,  reach  for  the  nearest  paper,  and  make  unintelli- 
gible signs  on  margins  of  books,  newspapers  and  the  backs 


X  INTRODUCTION 

of  envelopes — then  pause,  puzzled  between  a  desire  to 
tear  up  his  effort  and  an  intention  to  carry  on — then 
suspicion  will  whisper :  "  He  has  got  it.  The  hook  has 
struck — he  has  eaten  of  the  tree — La  Belle  Dame  Sans 
Merci  hath  him  in  thrall — he  has  been  reading  this  book  " 
and  is  "  counting  his  investments  in  the  infinite  and  the 
eternal — he  is  learning  to  draw." 

What,  after  all,  is  drawing  but  this — the  shortest  line 
between  the  two  points  of  an  infinity  withheld  from  our 
comprehension  ?  A  short  cut  that  the  artist  takes,  while 
the  mathematician  goes  round?  Through  and  beyond 
lines,  algebraic  symbols,  signs  and  formulae,  it  is  the 
artist's  trade — 

"To  see  a  world  in  a  grain  of  sand, 

And  a  heaven  in  a  wild  flower; 
Hold  Infinity  in  the  palm  of  his  hand, 
And  Eternity  in  an  hour." 

By  drawing  he  does,  if  he  is  lucky,  capture  and  bring 
home,  like  a  Palmer's  shell,  some  dried  scrap  of  the 
Infinity  in  which  he  has  travelled — for  himself  the  keep- 
sake from  a  dream;  and,  for  the  unbeliever,  something 
approaching  a  proof. 


CONTENTS 

CHAP.  PAGE 

INTRODUCTION         .         .       .  -j         .         .         .  vii 

I.     INTRODUCTORY       ......  i 

II.    DRAWING  MATERIALS        .....  7 

III.    ABSTRACT  STRAIGHT  LINES,  ANGLES  AND  CURVES  24 

III.  (Continued)   FREEHAND    DRAWING    OF   ABSTRACT 

LINES        .          .         .         .         .         .         -36 

IV.  FREEHAND  DRAWING  OF /NATURAL  FORMS,  CON- 

SISTING   MAINLY    OF    PLANE    SURFACES    OR 

SINGLE  LINES     ......  42 

V.    THE  THIRD  AND  FOURTH  DIMENSIONS        .         .  47 

VI.    THE  PICTURE  PLANE        .....  56 

VII.     FORMAL  PERSPECTIVE       .....  64 

VIII.    DRAWING  OF  SOLID  OBJECTS    ...          -70 

IX.     SOLID  OBJECTS  IN  SHADE  AND  SHADOW      .         .  96 

X.     MODELLING  OF  SOLID  OBJECTS.          .          .         .  m 

XI.     EXPRESSION    OF    SOLIDS    IN    RELATION    TO    ONE 

ANOTHER — AERIAL  PERSPECTIVE    .         .         .  124 

XII.     SHADOWS,  REFLECTIONS  AND  AERIAL  PERSPECTIVE  133 

XIII.  FIGURE  DRAWING    ......  139 

XIV.  BEAUTY 159 

XV.     CONCLUSION  IN  PLASTER  .....  185 


XI 


LINE 


INTRODUCTORY 

WHETHER  drawing  preceded  writing  or  writing  drawing 
might  have  been  difficult  to  say  ;  but  that  drawing  came 
first  may  at  any  rate  be  assumed  from  a  study  of  the 
normal  human  progress  as  observed  in  the  growth  of  an 
ordinary  child,  quite  apart  from  the  evidence  of  scholars 
as  to  the  evolution  or  devolution  of  written  symbols 
from  representations  of  observed  form.  Though  not  so 
early  as  speech,  it  is  probably  the  earliest  form  of  the 
conscious  and  wilful  arts  of  expression  for  its  own  sake, 
as  soon  as  the  line  of  absolute  necessity  or  use  has  been 
passed,  unless  making  a  noise  be  accounted  music  —  and 
so  the  earliest  effort  at  rendering  thought  permanent. 

A  child  will  begin  to  draw  crude  symbols  of  .things 
seen  before  he  will  learn  to  write,  and  this  drawing  will 
proceed  from  impulse,  whereas  writing  must  be  taught. 

This  appears  to  stand  to  reason,  for  a  drawing,  a 
visible  mark,  stands  as  a  symbol  of  something  seen  in 
order  to  be  recognizable  by  another;  and  this  symbol 
may  be  so  elaborated  as  to  be  so  like  the  thing  seen  as 
to  be  under  certain  conditions  deceptive  enough  to  be 
mistaken  for  the  thing  symbolized. 

In  the  case  of  written  speech  or  song  the  symbol  is 
incapable  of  being  mistaken  for  the  thing  symbolized  by 


2  LINE 

the  word.  Not  until  mechanical  means  of  reproduction 
of  sound  were  introduced  (which  significantly  or  other- 
wise followed  photography,  which  is  the  mechanical 
means  of  reproducing  appearances)  did  it  become  possible 
to  place  sound  on  record  otherwise  than  by  means  of 
symbols  which  had  to  be  translated  into  sound  in  the 
mind  of  the  reader  after  passing  through  the  sense  either 
of  sight  or  touch. 

All  these  symbols  of  sound  had  to  be  agreed  upon  by 
any  community  employing  them,  just  as  the  language 
of  a  tribe  or  people  was  an  agreed  convention,  con- 
stantly enlarging,  changing  and  adapting  itself  to  the 
requirements  of  the  tribe,  so  that  different  symbols  of 
sound,  or  systems  of  written  speech,  are  still  in  existence 
at  the  present  day — as  witness  the  Chinese,  Hebrew, 
Indian,  Persian,  Grecian  and  Roman  characters  and 
alphabets  and  their  many  modifications. 

On  the  other  hand,  drawing  was  and  will  remain  a 
universal  method  of  communication  of  ideas,  by  means 
of  symbols  intelligible  by  all,  regardless  of  time  and 
geography.  A  kitten  or  a  puppy  may  be  taken  in  by 
a  reflection.  A  dog  may  bark  at  it.  But  its  sense  of 
smell  as  well  as  of  sight  teaches  it  very  early  to  dis- 
criminate between  the  actual  thing  and  the  appearance. 
The  learned  pig  or  pony,  still  to  be  met  with  at  fairs, 
does  not  discriminate  the  letters  of  the  alphabet,  but  is 
trained  to  exercise  an  apparent  choice,  but  only  in 
obedience  to  the  indication  given  by  the  trainer. 

To  observe  that  the  symbols  used  vary  according  to 
the  skill  of  the  maker,  in  their  simplicity,  complexity 
and  subtlety,  or  in  the  taste  of  their  selection,  is  only  to 
recognize  that  they  are  the  work  of  the  human  hand 
and  brain;  beyond  these  factors,  which  are  primary  in 


INTRODUCTORY  3 

the  artist's  mind,  concerned  directly  with  his  own  primi- 
tive impulse  towards  expression,  must  be  reckoned  the 
effect  of  fashion  upon  his  employment  of  them — first  as 
to  such  symbols  as  he  has  already  seen  employed,  which 
will  be  easier  to  imitate  than  to  recreate  anew  (since  it 
is  easier  to  follow  than  to  lead),  and  second  from  the 
pressure  of  public  opinion,  which  will  more  readily  accept 
,  symbols  to  which  it  is  already  accustomed  than  worry 
itself  by  following  the  track  of  the  exploring  artist's  mind. 
The  puppy  that  may  be  taken  in  by  the  realistic  reflection 
in  the  mirror  cannot  understand  a  drawing  at  all. 

Form  being  the  first  essential  of  any  material  object, 
any  means  that  expresses  this  must  take  precedence  of 
such  as  can  express  only  an  attribute  of  the  form,  and 
this  being  so,  sculpture  (or  drawing  in  the  round), 
which  repeats  the  tangibility,  and  drawing  upon  the 
flat  must  take  precedence  of  any  means  taken  towards 
the  coloration  or  scent  or  sound  produced  by  objects 
or  their  activities.  Leaving  sculpture  and  its  tangi- 
bility as  a  solid  aside,  drawing,  being  the  means  of 
expressing  the  essential  shape  of  an  object  and  its  bulk 
and  situation  in  relation  to  others,  must  be  the  primary 
consideration  in  any  scheme  of  visible  symbolization  of 
that  object. 

That  all  men  see  alike  is  not  to  be  maintained,  but  it 
may  be  demonstrated  that  men — and  women  too,  for 
that  matter — see  much  more  nearly  alike  than  is  generally 
supposed. 

The  story  of  Turner's  reply  to  the  lady  who  objected 
that  she  did  not  see  sunsets  as  he  painted  them — "  Don't 
you  wish  that  you  could,  Madam?  " — has  been  almost 
as  often  misunderstood  as  it  has  been  quoted;  having 
been  taken  as  supporting  the  idea  that  Turner  saw  things 


4  LINE 

differently  from  the  bulk  of  man-  and  woman-kind  and 
was  even  proud  of  the  fact.  A  learned  optician  wrote 
an  essay  to  prove  that  Turner  suffered  from  astigmatism 
as  evidenced  by  his  pictures. 

It  used  to  be  thought  that  the  Chinese  and  Japanese 
artists  saw  differently  from  Europeans.  The  early 
Italian  painters  have  been  nicknamed  "  squint-eyed 
Primitives";  and  Gaugin  and  Van  Gogh  regarded  as 
innovators  of  new  ways  of  seeing.  Whistler,  because 
he  saw  things  as  beautiful  or  beautified  by  the  semi- 
obscurity  of  tone,  was  thought  to  see  differently  from  the 
man  in  the  street.  We  are  taught  to  read  rather  than 
to  see.  We  recognize  similar  streets  rather  by  name 
than  by  appearance,  and  our  powers  of  observation  run 
the  risk  of  atrophy  from  lack  of  use.  It  is  not  that  one 
artist's  optical  equipment  is  different  from  another's,  or 
from  that  of  the  ordinary  man,  that  produces  the  difference 
between  one  man's  pictures  and  those  of  another.  It 
was  not  Turner's  astigmatism,  nor  was  it  a  mote,  a  beam, 
or  a  squint  in  the  eye  of  the  Chinese  or  the  Italian  primi- 
tives which  brought  about  a  differentiation  of  symbols 
between  the  art  of  one  and  another.  When  a  man  or 
woman  defends  an  inaccurate  drawing  which  purports  to 
be  a  true  representation  on  the  score  of  "  that  being  the 
way  they  see  it,"  we  may  set  them  down  as  untruthful. 
That  no  two  painters  sitting  side  by  side  painting  the 
same  subject  will  paint  exactly  alike  is  also  true. 

It  is  not  that  they  see  differently,  but  that  they  will 
be  differently  interested,  and,  supposing  them  to  vary 
temperamentally  while  being  equally  skilled,  their 
emphasis  will  naturally  fall  differently.  The  selections 
they  make  will  consciously  or  unconsciously  vary  one 
from  another.  The  interest  of  an  artist  varies  from  day 


INTRODUCTORY  5 

to  day;  and  it  is  a  difficulty  he  frequently  experiences 
to  recapture  an  earlier  frame  of  mind  in  continuing  work 
already  begun.  Though  temperamentally  alike  as  twins, 
it  is  still  likely  that  two  artists  may  vary  in  skill,  or 
temporary  aim,  and  that  the  results  will  differ  accord- 
ingly. It  is  these  differences  that  constitute  personality 
in  art.  Turner,  if  he  had  set  himself  the  task,  had 
sufficient  skill  at  any  time  in  his  career  to  have  painted 
something  uncommonly  like  a  coloured  photograph  of 
any  landscape  in  front  of  him,  just,  indeed,  as  he  saw  it. 
There  are  early  Chinese  drawings  in  which  a  convention 
extraordinarily  like  that  of  Holbein  is  employed ;  Botticelli 
and  certain  of  the  Japanese  masters  have  so  much  in 
common  that  it  is  frequently  more  the  medium  and  the 
subject  than  any  personal  outlook  that  divides  the  work 
of  one  from  the  other. 

Two  highly  skilled  artists  whose  work  from  Nature 
varies  as  much  as  variation  is  possible,  if  set  to  copy 
conscientiously  a  picture  by  a  third  artist,  will  yet 
produce  works  almost  identical;  thus  showing  that  their 
vision,  so  far  as  vision  is  a  matter  of  eye-sight,  is  exactly 
similar  in  every  particular,  and  that  skill  or  handling 
alone  will  differentiate  one  result  from  another. 

More  even  than  in  the  case  suggested  above  of  two 
artists  at  work  upon  the  same  subject  at  the  same  time 
and  place  whose  work  varies  in  accordance  with  tempera- 
ment, skill,  upbringing,  aims,  intentions,  and  the  medium 
employed,  will  the  work  of  races  or  nations  separated 
by  blood,  religion,  language,  customs  and  ideas,  even  by 
thousands  of  miles  in  space,  and  hundreds  of  years  in 
time,  differ  one  from  another.  Yet  it  is  not  the  differences 
so  much  as  the  similarities  of  the  work  that  are  more 
remarkable. 


6  LINE 

That  there  is  some  underlying  principle  common  to 
all  pictorial  art  is  therefore  obvious ;  and  it  is  our  purpose 
to  examine  such  of  those  principles  as  apply  in  the  case  of 
drawing,  which,  as  already  suggested,  is  itself  the  basis 
of  pictorial  art,  since  it  is  the  simplest  form  of  symbolism 
of  things  seen. 


II 

DRAWING  MATERIALS 

, 

A  LINE  being  "  the  trace  of  a  moving  point  having 
length  but  not  breadth,"  and  a  point  "  having  neither 
length,  breadth,  nor  thickness,"  so  far  as  theory  goes, 
and  leaving  the  ideal,  it  falls  to  be  discussed  what  is  a 
"trace"  or  "line"  in  practice,  what  in  practice  is  a 
"  point,"  and  how,  in  practice,  is  it  moved? 

Let  us  take  the  point  first. 

Probably  the  earliest  drawing  was  made  with  a  twig 
of  charred  stick,  such  as  is  still  largely  used,  or  it  may 
have  been  scratched  upon  the  sand,  or  in  clay.  "  Willow 
charcoal  "  is  sold  by  all  artists'  colourmen,  and  is  doubtless 
as  good,  but  no  better  than  it  used  to  be.  It  varies 
largely  in  freedom  of  working  and  in  richness  of  colour 
— some  being  harsh  and  uncertain  in  action,  yielding 
alternately  a  free  black  line  and  an  almost  imperceptible 
scratch. 

Altogether  preferable  to  the  stick  charcoal  is  the 
Siberian  compressed  charcoal.  This  is  not  yet  so  well 
known  or  so  much  used  as  it  might  be.  It  is  put  up  in 
round  sticks  much  like  pastel,  and  is  graded  in  regular 
degrees  of  hardness  and  softness,  from  a  stick  yielding 
a  precise  grey  line,  and  that  only  under  pressure,  to  one 
of  so  crumbling  and  powdery  a  character  and  of  such 
density  of  blackness  that  it  requires  the  utmost  delicacy 
of  handling  to  avoid  ponderosity  where  such  is  not 
desirable. 

An  advantage  in  the  use  of   charcoal  nicely  balanced 

7 


8  LINE 

as  a  disadvantage,  is  its  slight  capacity  of  adherence, 
particularly  in  the  soft  and  most  freely  working  varieties. 
Generally  the  richer  the  effect  the  more  readily  can  it 
be  removed,  being  little  more  than  a  line  of  dark  dust 
lying  upon  the  upper  surface  of  the  paper,  so  that  it 
may  be  flicked  off  with  a  duster,  or  even  be  simply  shaken 
away.  My  friend  A.  S.  Hartrick  told  me  of  a  Zulu 
model  at  Julian's  or  Cormon's  studio  in  Paris  who  was 
an  expert  with  the  stock-whip,  giving,  as  an  exhibition 
of  his  skill,  a  flick  at  a  study  of  himself,  at  the  full  length 
of  the  whip.  Without  tearing  or  damaging  the  paper, 
he  shook  every  loose  particle  of  charcoal  off  it,  and  turned 
what  had  been  a  carefully  drawn  nigger  into  a  pale  ghost 
upon  the  white  sheet. 

A  charcoal  drawing  should  be  "  fixed  "  as  soon  as 
finished. 

An  efficient  and  inexpensive  fixative  may  be  simply 
made  by  making  a  saturated  solution  of  fiddler's  rosin  in 
methylated  spirit.  This  should  be  applied  with  a  spray, 
either  in  the  form  of  a  blow-pipe,  or  with  a  bulb  such  as 
ladies  use  for  scent,  which  latter  is  recommended  to 
bilious  subjects. 

Charcoal  has  also  the  advantage  of  deadness  of  colour. 
It  does  not  reflect  light,  as  does  lead  pencil,  but  absorbs 
it,  so  that  it  reproduces  well  photographically.  A  fair 
approximation  may  sometimes  be  made  by  direct  process 
reproduction  of  a  charcoal  drawing  in  line  without  the 
intervention  of  a  ruled  screen  in  the  camera,  though  a 
certain  amount  of  delicacy  will  generally  be  lost  in  the 
printing.  Such  reproduction  should  not  be  attempted  if 
fine  gradations  have  been  attempted  by  smearing  the 
charcoal. 

Black    chalk    shares    some    of   the    characteristics    of 


DRAWING   MATERIALS  9 

charcoal.  It  yields  a  dense  black  and  does  not  shine. 
It  varies  considerably  in  hardness  and  softness,  and  has 
an  advantage  in  that  it  may  be  brought  to  a  fine  point 
which  will  not  wear  down  so  rapidly  as  charcoal,  so  that 
it  is  possible  to  carry  out  work  requiring  the  utmost 
-.minuteness  with  a  greater  degree  of  precision  than  is 
easily  possible  with  charcoal. 

To  sharpen  charcoal  or  chalk  with  a  knife  it  is  advisable 
always  to  cut  from  the  point  backwards,  otherwise  the 
end  will  almost  inevitably  be  snapped  off.  An  easier 
and  more  rapid  method  of  sharpening  chalk  is  to  have  a 
sheet  of  glass  or  emery  paper  always  at  hand,  by  which 
means  a  mimber  of  points  can  readily  be  prepared.  Paul 
Renouard,  who  used  chalk  more  than  anything  else, 
always  had  about  a  dozen  ready  prepared,  so  that  he 
could  select  a  suitable  point  at  will,  without  having  to 
stop  working  for  the  irritating  job  of  sharpening  one. 
He  used  Hardtmuth's  chalks  in  holders;  as  also  did 
Phil  May  when  working  in  chalk,  though  most  often 
he  made  his  studies  in  lead-pencil. 

Beautiful  results  are  obtainable  with  "  sanguine,"  or 
red  chalk.  The  writer  has  little  experience  of  it  in 
working,  but  has  found  certain  kinds  to  be  of  a  greasy 
nature,  rejecting  water-colour.  This  may  have  been  of 
an  artificial  kind,  in  which  wax  was  used  as  a  medium 
for  the  colour.  It  is  not  always  good  for  students  to 
use,  as  from  its  own  quality  of  colour  it  may  make  a 
bad  drawing  deceptively  attractive  among  a  number  of 
black  ones. 

Chalk,  like  charcoal,  being  absorbent  of  light,  and 
non-reflective,  reproduces  admirably.  It  does  not  rub 
so  easily,  and  so  stands  in  less  need  of  fixing  than  charcoal. 
It  is  nevertheless  advisable  to  fix  drawings  as  soon  as 


TO  LINE 

possible  where  precision  and  sharpness  of  line  have  any 
value,  as  very  little  chafing  or  knocking  about,  even  in 
portfolios,  will  take  the  "  edge  "  off  them. 

Lead-pencil,  as  commonly  known  to-day,  is  of  com- 
paratively modern  introduction.  The  present  generation 
hardly  knows,  even  by  reputation,  the  old  Cumberland 
lead,  which  used  to  be  advertised  in  all  the  stationers' 
windows,  and  made  English  lead- pencils  the  finest  in 
the  world.  Liking  a  chisel  edge  for  drawing  with,  but 
not  finding  such  as  the  artists'  colourmen  supplied,  if 
they  supplied  them  at  all,  of  sufficient  width,  the  writer 
had  a  fad  for  a  while  of  drawing  with  a  carpenter's  pencil. 
These  are  coarse,  gritty  and  grey.  It  was  therefore  with 
delight  that  at  Brown's,  the  stationer's  shop  that  used 
to  be  in  the  Strand  opposite  St.  Clement  Danes,  hard 
by  the  old  Graphic  office,  he  discovered  a  supply  of  a 
gross  of  pencils  that  had  been  in  stock  for  fifty  years  or 
so,  and  that  they  had  never  been  able  to  sell.  These 
had  been  made,  they  thought,  for  J.  D.  Harding,  and  it 
is  easy  to  imagine  him  using  them  for  the  various  "  tree 
touches,"  ash,  oak,  elm,  etc.,  that  it  was  the  fashion  for 
drawing-masters  to  impart  to  young  ladies  with  a  "  nice 
taste  in  ruins "  and  a  penchant  for  "  landskips  "  in 
those  romantic  days.  These  pencils  were  of  solid  Cum- 
berland lead,  six  B,  of  a  generous  width,  T37  or  thereabouts, 
that  cut  like  cheese.  What  stuff  it  was !  What  a 
vintage  !  The  gross  was  bought  and  shared  out  with 
Hartrick,  Phil  May  and  Renouard.  They  were  a  delight 
to  use,  and  it  was  a  joy  to  give  one  away  to  anyone  who 
could  appreciate  it.  Phil  May's  share  was  very  little 
used,  as  a  retriever  he  had  at  that  time  fell  in  love  with 
them  and  the  box,  and  chawed  them  to  bits  !  There 
are,  therefore,  none  or  few  of  his  drawings  which  show 


DRAWING   MATERIALS  IT 

the  characteristics  of  a.  chisel-edged  pencil  having  been 
employed.  Modern  pencils  are  made  of  compressed 
black-lead-powder  and  clay  in  varying  proportions 
according  to  the  degree  of  hardness  or  softness.  There 
being  an  excess  of  clay  over  graphite  in  the  harder  degrees, 
there  is  a  consequent  greyness  or  lightness  in  the  line 
arising  from  the  double  cause  that  the  amalgam  is  re- 
duced in  blackness  and  that  less  is  discharged  upon  the 
paper. 

The  greatest  characteristic  of  a  lead-pencil  line  is  its 
metallic  silvery  lustre.  A  fairly  rich  black  is  obtainable 
in  some  degrees ;  but  it  does  not  compare  in  this  quality 
with  chalk.  It  is  capable  of  being  very  sharply  pointed, 
and  so  is  an  instrument  of  most  delicate  precision  for 
line,  as  well  as  yielding  a  considerable  range  of  tones, 
extending  from  the  delicacy  of  silver  point  almost  to 
the  richness  of  colour  of  chalk,  which  it  exceeds  in  its 
peculiar  luminosity.  On  account  of  its  lustre  it  is  some- 
what tricky  in  reproduction,  as,  unless  reflections  are 
carefully  guarded  against  by  the  photographer,  it  may 
photograph  more  faintly  than  the  drawing,  some  parts 
even  disappearing  altogether.  The  softer  the  pencil,  or, 
in  other  words,  the  blacker  the  drawing,  the  more  liable 
is  it  to  rub,  and  so  should  be  fixed,  unless  it  is  to  be 
mounted  or  framed  at  once. 

It  is  best  not  to  endeavour  to  force  the  colour  either 
by  digging  into  the  paper,  or,  as  the  policeman  and  shop 
assistant  generally  do  with  their  pencil  stumps,  by  licking 
them,  but  to  accept  the  natural  limitation.  No  amount  of 
pressure  will  make  the  lead  blacker,  and  licking  only 
makes  it  mark  more  freely  for  a  stroke  or  two,  so  that 
an  uneven  result  is  likely. 

The  drawings  of  many  of  the  English  illustrators  of 


12  LINE 

the  'sixties  were  made  upon  the  wood  in  lead-pencil— 
notably  those  of  Boyd  Houghton  for  the  Arabian  Nights. 
All  the  characteristics  of  pencil  drawing,  even  some  of 
the  flexibility  of  its  line,  are  necessarily  lost  in  a  wood 
engraving.  This,  it  should  be  said,  was  not  the  engraver's 
fault,  but  an  inherent  limitation  of  the  method.  It  is 
sad  to  realize  how  much  of  delicacy  had  to  be  destroyed 
in  order  to  print  what  was  left  ! 

The  French  wood-engraver  Florian  achieved  a  remark- 
able translation  of  a  pencil  drawing  that  was  published 
in  the  Revue  Illustre  about  1890.  This  was  a  tour  de 
force,  but  it  was  exercised  upon  a  larger  scale  than  the 
ordinary  book  or  magazine  could  carry,  and  upon  a 
simpler  drawing  than  is  frequently  necessary  in  illustra- 
tion. Such  work  would  be  out  of  the  question  ninety-nine 
times  out  of  a  hundred. 

We  now  come  to  consider  such  instruments  as  are 
vehicles  of  colour,  not  giving  colour  themselves,  as  do 
pencil,  charcoal,  etc.  Of  pens  a  volume  might  be  written. 
The  word  is  obviously  derived  from  penna,  a  wing,  or 
wing  feather,  and  so  means  originally  a  quill.  These  are 
now  little  used  even  by  old-fashioned  lawyers,  though  a 
judge  may  still  punctuate  his  summing-up  with  a  large 
feather;  but  the  general  use  of  quills  is  recalled  by  the 
word  penknife,  long  after  the  association  of  the  ideas  of 
knife  and  pen  has  ceased. 

Artists  and  colourmen  still  call  a  certain  type  of  small 
steel-barreled  drawing  pen  by  the  name  of  "  crow-quills." 

Metal  pens  used  by  the  Romans  at  the  time  of  the 
occupation  of  Britain  are  to  be  seen  in  our  London 
Museums,  but  it  was  not  till  well  into  the  nineteenth 
century  that  the  metal  pen  was  so  improved  as  gradually 
to  supplant  the  quill  in  popular  use. 


DRAWING   MATERIALS  13 

At  the  present  time  -the  choice  is  so  great  that  every 
fancy  can  be  met,  from  the  sharpest  point  to  the  broadest 
chisel  edge,  cut  at  any  angle — with  one  or  more  slits  and 


"  THE  VISION  OF  SIN 

Practically  the  same  in  treatment   as   the    "  Lady   Flora  "    drawing, 

based  as  it  is  mainly  upon  two  thicknesses  of  line,  being  laid  in  heavily 

with  a  Waverley  pen,  and  qualified  with  a  303  Gillot. 

It  is  pleasant  to  remember  that  Phil  May  wrote  "  Kow-Tow  "  on 
the  margin  of  this  drawing. 

with  or  without  reservoirs,  and  in  so  great  a  variety  of 
patterns  as  to  be  bewildering. 

It  is  advisable  to  have  a  number  of  penholders,  each 


14  LINE 

fitted  with  a  different  style  and  width  of  pen  point,  so 
that  the  right  instrument  can  immediately  be  chosen. 
The  correct  pen  to  use  will  depend  upon  the  scale  of 


FROM  "  OMAR  KHAYYAM  " 

An  effort  to  maintain  stringency  of  style  in  the  presentation  at  once 

of  form  and  light  and  shade  without  allowing  the  effort  or  the  method 

to  obtrude  itself.     (Pen  used,  Gillott's  303.) 

the  intended  work,  upon  the  surface  upon  which  the 
drawing  is  to  be  made,  and  the  style  in  which  it  is  pro- 
posed to  draw.  For  a  clear  line  of  unvarying  thickness, 
as  in  so-called  "  decorative  "  work,  a  stiffish  pen  that 


DRAWING  MATERIALS  15 

naturally  yields  the  required  thickness  without  pressure 
is  the  best.  Where  surface  modelling  is  to  be  attempted, 
if  simple,  a  greater  degree  of  flexibility  is  desirable ;  but 
where  the  range  of  "  colour  "  is  great,  or  fine  shades  or 
textures  are  to  be  suggested,  the  pen  point  should  be  as 
fine  as  possible,  but  so  flexible  that  it  will  readily  yield 
a  rich,  fat  line  on  pressure,  but,  this  relaxed,  will  immedi- 
ately give  a  fine  line  again,  like  a  good  sable  brush. 

A  great  deal  of  nerve  will  be  saved  and  better  results 
will  be  obtained  by  seeing  to  it  that  the  right  pens  are 
handy  when  required,  as  a  drawing  may  easily  be  ruined  by 
attempting  to  carry  on  with  a  pen  unsuited  to  the  purpose. 

A  fine  pen  that  has  to  be  pressed  upon  steadily  through- 
out the  length  of  a  line  in  order  to  make  it  yield  the 
requisite  thickness  will  generally  betray  the  artist  into 
irrelevant  accents.  The  choice  of  such  a  pen  is  a  more 
common  error  than  that  of  choosing  a  too  heavy  one, 
since  timidity  is  more  common  than  boldness,  against 
which  it  is  not  generally  necessary  to  issue  a  warning. 

A  curious  instrument  is  used  by  packers  for  addressing 
parcels  that  may  be  of  interest  and  sometimes  of  use  to 
the  artist.  It  is  a  facile  means  of  drawing  generous 
curves  on  a  large  scale,  as  it  is  designed  to  carry  a  large 
supply  of  ink,  and  should  be  handled  on  the  chisel  edge 
principle,  or  as  the  quill  was  used  by  the  old  scribes. 
For  large  work  it  is  difficult  to  imagine  anything  better, 
unless  it  be  a  brush. 

Reed  pens,  like  the  quill,  have  been  almost  entirely 
supplanted  by  the  steel  nib.  The  writer  has  small 
experience  of  them,  but  well  remembers  J.  Pennell,  that 
most  expert  technician,  getting  excited  about  them ;  and 
if  an  artist  can  become  pleasurably  excited  about  the 
handling  of  a  tool,  that  tool  is  for  the  time  being  the 


l6  LINE 

best  possible.  That  it  is  the  calamus  of  the  ancients 
lends  it  a  special  charm.  A  set  of  them  as  used  by  the 
Egyptians  can  be  seen  in  a  case  at  the  British  Museum, 
doubtless  as  they  fell  from  the  hand  of  the  artist  as 
though  but  yesterday,  whom  age-long  death  has  made 
more  reverend  in  our  eyes.  They  are  not  always  easy 
to  buy  since  "  The  demand  is  so  small.  The  last  has 
just  been  sold,"  or  "  The  new  consignment  that  we  are 
expecting  has  not  yet  arrived  from  Japan  " — so  that  just 
when  they  are  wanted  they  may  not  be  had  in  the  shops. 

Of  instruments  that  leave  a  trace  without  colour  either 
by  incision  or  in  a  yielding  material  such  as  wax,  the 
most  important  are  the  wood-cutter's  knife,  the  engraver's 
burin,  and  the  etcher's  needle. 

The  stylus  was  probably  the  earliest  writing  instru- 
ment, being  used  to  impress  marks  in  wax  or  clay,  and 
though  it  has  doubtless  had  a  certain  influence  in  the 
formation  of  letters,  this  has  been  almost  obliterated  by 
the  use  of  the  pen  by  which  the  original  design  has  been 
modified,  and  the  strokes  even  in  our  modern  movable 
types  are  derived  rather  from  the  thin  and  thick  strokes 
of  the  pen  than  from  the  incisions  of  the  stylus,  punch,  or 
chisel.  Frequently  the  carved  inscriptions  on  our  monu- 
ments and  gravestones  show  the  reactionary  influence  of 
penmanship,  the  child,  in  this  case  more  paradoxically 
than  usual,  fathering  the  man. 

The  etcher's  needle  is  the  nearest  approach  to  the  stylus 
in  common  modern  employment  by  artists,  used  as  it  is 
either  as  a  "  dry  point  "  or  preliminary  to  the  use  of  acid. 

In  dry  point  a  line  is  scratched  upon  a  metal  plate, 
the  ploughed  scratch  throwing  up  what  is  called  the 
"  burr  "  by  the  side  of  the  incised  line  in  proportion  to 
the  depth  of  the  scratch  made.  It  is  mainly  this  burr 


DRAWING  MATERIALS  17 

which  holds  the  printing  ink  when  the  plate  is  wiped 
after  being  heavily  coated  with  it.  Either  a  steel  needle 
or  a  diamond  point  is  used. 

The  late  William  Strang  devised  an  instrument  with 
a  hooked  end  which  he  used  largely  for  forcible  dry- 
point  work;  this  instrument  required  less  effort  than 
the  straight  needle,  as  it  made  a  more  direct  incision,  and 
could  be  dragged  with  more  facility,  as  well  as  guided 
with  more  precision  and  certainty  than  the  needle,  which 
is  capable  of  running  away  with  the  hand. 

The  true  "  etcher's  "  needle  is  either  the  same  or  an 
instrument  similar  to  that  he  uses  for  dry  point,  but  its 
purpose  is  not  to  make  an  incision  in  the  plate,  which, 
for  "  etching  "  proper,  has  previously  been  coated  with 
wax,  but  only  to  scratch  away  the  wax  and  so  lay  bare 
the  metal  to  the  subsequent  action  of  acid.  It  is  the 
acid  and  not  the  needle  which  furrows  the  line  in  such  a 
manner  that  it  will  hold  the  desired  width  and  depth  of 
printer's  ink.  The  word  "  etching "  means  "biting," 
and  refers,  not,  as  is  frequently  thought,  to  the  use  of 
the  needle,  but  to  the  use  of  the  acid.  An  "  etching," 
or  eau  forte,  is  the  result  of  two  main  operations,  respec- 
tively biting  and  scratching,  which  operations  should 
not  be  confused.  The  present  writer  once  ventured  to 
introduce  this  definition  of  the  two  processes  as  "  biting 
and  scratching  "  into  the  draft  of  an  official  report ;  but 
it  never  got  beyond  the  draft,  being  considered  too  vivid 
and  undignified  for  an  official  document. 

The  burin  is  a  V  or  wedge-shaped  chisel,  which  is 
driven  through  the  surface  of  the  metal  or  wood  from 
which  it  ploughs  out  a  strip  without  leaving  a  burr,  as 
does  the  dry  point,  which  "  ears  "  the  metal  without 
removing  it.  When  used  for  engraving  on  metal  the 


l8  LINE 

finished  plate  is  covered  with  printing  ink  and  then 
wiped,  as  in  etching  :  this  leaves  the  ink  in  the  incised 
line,  while  the  surface  of  the  plate  is  clean.  A  print  being 
taken,  the  line  represents  the  trough  cut  by  the  burin 
in  the  metal.  The  ordinary  visiting  card  is  an  example 
of  engraving  on  copper ;  but  the  printing  of  these,  where 
many  are  required,  is  frequently  done  by  taking  transfers 
from  the  plate  to  a  lithographic  stone,  so  that  a  number 
can  be  printed  at  once,  more  rapidly  and  at  less  expense. 

In  the  case  of  a  wood-engraving  the  reverse  takes  place. 
It  is  not  those  parts  removed  by  the  burin  that  afford 
lodgment  for  the  printer's  ink,  but  the  surface  left  standing 
and  untouched  by  it.  The  sunk  parts  receive  no  ink  at 
all,  only  those  parts  left  at  the  original  level  of  the  block 
receiving  ink  from  the  roller  with  which  ink  is  applied. 
It  is  not  the  black  line,  dot,  or  space  in  the  print,  but  the 
white  line,  dot,  or  space,  which  represents  the  labour  of 
the  engraver.  "  Wood-peckers "  was  the  appropriate 
nickname  for  the  engravers  at  the  time  when  the  papers 
and  magazines  relied  on  artists  and  engravers  for  their 
illustrations,  before  the  camera  and  the  "  process-monger  " 
or  "  process-server  "  supplanted  first  one  and  then  the 
other,  scattering  them  like  ninepins  in  a  skittle  alley. 

Wood-cutting  is  one  of  the  earliest  means  used  for 
the  reproduction  and  multiplication  of  drawings  by 
printing.  It  was  supplanted  in  Europe  by  the  introduc- 
tion of  the  burin,  previously  used  only  for  engraving  on 
metal;  which  introduction  is  generally  attributed  to  the 
Bewicks.  Wood-cutting  and  wood-engraving  differ  in 
two  ways;  for  not  only  is  the  tool  employed  a  knife  in 
one  case  and  a  chisel  in  the  other,  but  the  wood  used  is 
different,  not  only  in  its  character,  being  softer  for  cutting 
(as  pear  or  cherry)  and  hard  for  engraving  (generally  box), 


DRAWING   MATERIALS  IQ 

but  the  wood-cutter  uses  the  block  plank-wise,  while  the 
engraver  uses  the  end  grain.  The  use  of  the  graver 
made  much  finer  and  more  elaborate  work  possible; 
while  the  primary  hardness  of  the  wood  and  the  direction 
of  the  grain  made  it  possible  to  print  practically  unlimited 
editions  under  conditions  that  would  have  worn  out  a 
pear-tree  block. 

Of  late  years  artists  have  revived  the  use  of  the  soft 
plank  wood  for  original  work,  as  well  as  the  wood-cutter's 
knife.  Even  linoleum  has  been  employed  in  place  of 
wood.  As  stereotypes,  electrotypes,  or  photographic 
reproductions  can  be  made  from  these  if  necessary,  the 
size  of  an  edition  is  not  limited  by  the  softness  of  the 
wood  or  other  material  chosen  by  the  artist,  though 
naturally  the  character  of  the  work  to  be  done  is  influenced 
by  the  limitations  of  the  tools  and  materials  employed. 
Very  fine  and  minute  work  will  require  a  hard  surface 
and  a  precise  instrument,  while  for  broad  lines  and  masses 
the  softer  the  better,  consistently  with  the  printing 
requirements  of  the  surface. 

For  commercial  purposes  both  wood-engraving  and 
wood-cutting  have  been  almost  extinct  for  many  years, 
being  employed  only  by  enthusiasts  for  particular  pur- 
poses and  effects,  such  as  limited  editions  appealing  only 
to  the  few,  of  book  plates  and  such-like,  where  the 
designer  usually  acts  as  his  own  engraver  or  cutter  for 
love  of  the  method  rather  than  for  love  of  profit — out 
of  which  starved  conditions  so  much  good  work  arises. 

The  use  of  the  word  "  wood-cut  "  remains — even 
shortened  to  "  cuts,"  in  reference  to  engravings  on  wood, 
or  to  other,  even  photographic,  methods  of  reproduction 
where  no  engraving  tool,  let  alone  a  knife,  has  been 
employed.  Without  any  desire  to  be  pedantic,  it  is 


20  LINE 

thought  worth  while  to  point  out,  particularly  to  writers 
on  art,  the  interesting  differences  that  exist  between 
wood-cuts  and  wood-engravings  and  process  reproductions, 
and  the  consequent  importance  of  discrimination.  There 
is  as  much  likeness  and  as  much  technical  difference  as 
between  dry  and  wet  fly-fishing  and  tickling  for  trout,  or 
between  the  use  of  the  rifle,  the  smooth-bore  and  the  air- 
gun.  There  is  room  for  a  book  on  the  sportsmanship  of  Art. 

In  a  category  by  themselves  stand  lithographic  "  chalk  " 
and  lithographic  "  ink,"  which  are  very  nearly  of  the 
same  composition,  consisting  of  the  same  elements 
differently  proportioned.  Each  name  is  in  a  sense  a 
misnomer,  as  the  substance  is  neither  chalk  nor  ink  in 
the  generally  accepted  sense  of  either  word.  It  is  true 
that  in  so  far  as  "  ink  "  may  be  derived  from  "  encaustic  " 
in  its  relation  to  burnt  wax,  there  is  a  certain  coincidental 
connection  of  ideas  between  "  ink  "  as  commonly  used 
and  the  lithographic  ink  invented  by  Senefelder. 

This  "  chalk  "  or  "  ink  "  is  generally  compounded  of 
soap,  tallow,  wax,  bitumen  and  lampblack  in  varying  pro- 
portions ;  the  soap  being  introduced  to  render  it  soluble 
in  water,  the  tallow  and  wax  to  render  it  resistant  to  acid 
and  water,  and  the  black  to  make  the  effect  of  the  artist's 
work  clearly  visible  to  him  while  making  the  drawing. 

It  .is  upon  these  properties  that  lithography  is  based, 
lithography  being  the  art  of  drawing  upon  and  printing 
from  stone.  If  the  stone  upon  which  a  drawing  in  this 
chalk  has  been  made  be  damped,  it  is  possible  to  charge 
the  drawing  with  printing  ink  from  a  roller,  without 
soiling  the  stone  where  no  grease  has  previously  been 
deposited.  As,  however,  on  account  of  the  rapid  drying 
of  the  stone  and  other  risks  such  as  excessive  pressure 
from  the  roller,  the  white  parts  of  the  stone  are  apt  to 


DRAWING   MATERIALS  21 

take  ink  and  "  scum,"  to  use  the  printer's  phrase,  the 
stone  is  treated  with  a  mild  solution  of  nitric  acid,  which 
serves  two  purposes.  First,  it  fixes  the  soap  which  forms 
a  large  proportion  of  the  ingredients  of  the  chalk  or  ink, 
and,  secondly,  it  opens  up  the  surface  of  the  stone, 
slightly  pitting  and  roughening  it.  The  stone  is  then 
treated  with  a  wash  of  gum  which  enters  the  pores  of  the 
stone,  from  which  no  amount  of  water  alone  will  dislodge 
it.  The  gum  prevents  the  tallow  from  spreading  in  the 
stone;  and  it  remains  damp  longer,  and  as  gum  itself 
rejects  grease,  it  is  then  safe  to  proceed  with  the  damping 
and  rolling  up  of  the  stone  with  ink.  Even  should  the 
gum  dry,  and  grease  be  applied,  this  is  readily  washed 
away,  as  it  will  not  penetrate  the  gum. 

Lithographic,  chalk  is  made  in  varying  degrees  of 
hardness  and  softness.  It  is  generally  sold  in  round  or 
square  sticks,  but  can  be  bought  in  the  same  form  as 
lead-pencils  encased  in  wood  or  strips  of  paper.  It  is 
capable  of  making  a  mark  as  fine  as  the  most  delicate 
lead-pencil,  or  may  be  made  to  yield  a  stroke  as  fat  and 
black  as  may  be  obtained  from  Siberian  charcoal. 

Lithography  has  of  late  years  been  much  revived  by 
artists,  after  it  had  fallen  into  disrepute  on  account  of  its 
having  been  vulgarized  by  ignorant  hands  for  com- 
mercial purposes.  No  finer  work  was  produced  during 
the  war  than  the  posters  of  Brangwyn  and  the  series  of 
drawings  made  direct  on  the  stone,  some  actually  under 
fire,  by  Spencer  Pryse.  The  Senefelder  Club  has  been  the 
main  instrument  of  this  revival,  and  the  writer  is  proud 
to  have  been  its  godfather. 

For  its  employment  to  the  best  advantage  no  amount  of 
time  or  trouble  should  be  spared  to  obtain  a  suitably  grained 
surface  upon  the  stone  for  the  style  of  drawing  proposed. 


22  LINE 

The  best  work  can  only  be  obtained  by  directness  of 
treatment;  that  is,  by  striking  the  full  force  of  the 
intended  line  or  tone  at  the  very  beginning,  coaxing  the 
chalk  into  the  grain  of  the  stone  with  a  firm  hand.  If 
this  is  not  done,  the  chalk  is  simply  piled  up  upon  the 
tips  of  the  grain,  and  a  harsh  ropiness  inevitably  results, 
instead  of  the  juicy  or  velvety  richness  of  which  the 
medium  is  peculiarly  capable,  but  which  can  only  be 
obtained  by  coaxing  the  chalk  as  far  as  desirable  into 
the  valleys  of  the  grain  at  the  outset. 

The  usual  way  of  sharpening  lithographic  chalk  is  with 
a  penknife  cutting  from  the  proposed  point  backwards, 
as  in  the  case  of  ordinary  crayon ;  and  as  the  chalk  wears 
away  rapidly  upon  the  stone,  this  must  be  frequently 
done  if  a  sharp  point  is  required.  The  writer  claims  a 
little  credit  for  devising  a  method  whereby  time,  temper 
and  trouble  may  be  saved,  and  all  waste  of  chalk  done 
away  with.  His  method  is  to  take  the  chalk  and  hold 
one  end  some  little  way  above  a  lighted  candle  or  other 
flame — a  match  will  do.  Care  should  be  taken  to  soften 
only,  and  not  to  melt  the  chalk,  sufficiently  to  make  it 
easy  to  roll  or  press  the  end  into  any  desired  shape  between 
the  fingers.  This  is  the  work  of  a  few  seconds,  and  a 
point  of  any  fineness  or  a  chisel  edge  can  be  obtained  at 
will.  Of  course,  the  chalk  is  lengthened  in  the  process, 
so  that  a  new  chalk  will  not  go  back  into  the  box  in 
which  it  was  purchased.  It  is  therefore  advisable  to 
have  another  box  ready  to  receive  the  newly-sharpened 
sticks — an  ordinary  cigarette  carton  is  as  good  as  any- 
thing for  this  purpose.  Ten  or  a  dozen  sticks  may  be 
sharpened  or  reshaped  in  a  few  minutes  in  this  method, 
and  a  constant  supply  of  points  kept  ready  at  hand.  Odd 
ends  or  stumps  of  chalk  which  would  otherwise  be  thrown 


DRAWING  MATERIALS  23 

away  may  be  softened  and  stuck  together  by  heating 
the  ends  of  two  at  once  over  the  flame,  squeezing  them 
together,  and  rolling  the  joint  between  the  fingers  till  it 
is  thoroughly  welded. 

This  little  device  should  save  a  lithographer  consider- 
ably more  than  the  price  of  this  book  every  year,  and  I 
have  much  pleasure  in  laying  him  under  a  slight  obligation. 

Further,  as  lithography  is  the  most  autographic  of  all 
the  means  of  reproduction,  every  artist  should  practise 
it.  If  such  were  the  case,  all  artists,  and  not  only  litho- 
graphers, 'would  be  in  my  debt,  which  is  a  happy  thought 
wherewith  to  conclude  my  chapter  on  points. 


Ill 

ABSTRACT   STRAIGHT  LINES,   ANGLES  AND   CURVES 

A  LINE  is  a  trace  of  a  moving  point. 
Lines  are  considered  to  be  either  straight  or  curved, 
according   to    the   presence    or   absence    of    curvature 
appreciable  to  the  eye. 

The  Euclidian  definition  holds  good  of  a  straight  line 
as  being  the  shortest  line  between  two  given  points. 

All  measurement  is  relative.  But  in  order  to  establish 
any  system  of  measurement  it  is  necessary  to  find  a  unit 
either  to  multiply  or  divide. 

In  any  consideration  of  concrete  line  and  the  constitu- 
tion of  a  curve  we  must  start  with  a  point. 

For  the  artist's  purposes,  apart  from  the  mathema- 
^^P^^        tician's,  a  point  must  be  visible,  as  in 
[          ^V      the  centre  of  the  circle  A;   and  in  order 
I         .        1     to    be  visible   it   must   have    a   certain 
^^  J      magnitude,  unlike  the  theoretic  point  of 

the  mathematician.  The  concrete  point 
most  nearly  approaching  the  theoretic 
must  therefore  be  considered  as  having 
magnitude,  but  not  greater  in  one  direction  than  another  ; 
and  must  therefore  be  circular. 

All  lines,  no  matter  whether  curved  or  straight  or  what 
their  direction,  consist  of  a  series  of  tangential  points  as 
at  B. 


ABSTRACT  LINES  25 

For  the  purposes  of  demonstration  we  may  imagine 
these  points  much  magnified — as  here  :  -^—^ 

so  that  they  are  not  only  visible,  but  (       j 

may    the    more    easily    be    conceived     ^~~\ 
of  as  having  a  diameter  as  any  con-     \^^/ 
crete  thing  must  have ;  since  nothing  exists  which  cannot 
be  conceived  of  as  being  divisible.     Nevertheless  these 
points  are  to  be   looked  upon  as  the  smallest  possible 
units  to  be  employed  in  practice. 

A  line  has  length  greater  than  its  breadth ; 
therefore  the  shortest  conceivable  line  will 
consist  of  two  tangential  points  (as  shown 

Cat   G),   whose  united  diameters  form  the 
ip!     smallest  unit  of  any  line;  since  even  if  a 

third  point  C}A  be  added  whose  diameter  does  not 

continue  the  line  of  the  other  two  diameters,  this  cannot 
affect  the  relation  already  established  between  the  two 
points,  which  may  be  said  to  be  as  nearly  as  possible 
absolute,  as  shown  at  D. 


D 


It  will  be  seen  that  the  point  marked  QQ  establishes 

with  each  point  it  touches  a  relation  similar  to  that 
already  existing  between  the  other  two  points,  so  forming 
a  new  unit  of  line. 

So  long  as  the  diameters  of  the  units  meet  they  will  form 


26  LINE 

a  continuous  straight  line  as  at  E  ;  should  they  change 
direction  gradually  and  progressively  as  from  F  they  will 

QQQQQQQQe( 

E  F 

form'a  curve.  But  should  they  change  direction  abruptly 
or  violently  and  continue  in  another  straight  line  (as  at  G) 
a  perceptibly  angular  figure  will  be  produced,  without 
the  characteristics  of  a  curve,  the  essential  quality  of 
which  is  in  the  slight  perceptibility  of  the  angles  of 
which  it  is  composed. 


OQQOQOCD 


The  character  of  the  line  will  depend  upon  two  factors. 
First,  the  number  of  points,  if  any,  whose  diameters 
combine  beyond  the  inevitable  two;  and  second,  the 
angles  which  divergent  units  make  with  each  other. 

The  main  curves  are  I,  the  circle ;  II,  the  ellipse ;  III, 
the  oval,  and  IV,  the  spiral;  other  curves  being  either 
compounds  or  modifications  of  these. 

A  good  idea  of  angles  may  be  formed  by  taking  a  ruler 
and  drawing  the  letter  V  in  a  good  bold  Roman  character. 
Let  the  lines  be  three  inches  each;  then  see  how  many 
more  V's  can  be  drawn  inside  it  before  the  two  arms  touch 
and  so  become  one  line.  Having  drawn  as  many  as  possible 
inside  it,  try  how  many  can  be  drawn  outside  it  from  the 
apex  before  the  two  lines  become  continuous  as  one 
horizontal  line,  like  the  outer  sticks  of  an  extended  fan. 

If  all  these  lines  are  kept  of  even  length  they  will  be 
the  radii  of  a  circle.  If  from  the  V's  drawn  with  the  aid 


ABSTRACT  LINES  27 

of  a  ruler  the  eight  or  ten  which  most  nearly  divide  the 
space  between  the  upright  and  the  horizontal  are  chosen 
and  the  ends  joined,  it  will  be  seen,  that  although  the 


Curves  I,  II  and  III  composed  of  straight  lines,  drawn  with  a  ruler. 
Curve  IV  partly  freehand. 

resulting  line  is  in  every  part  straight,  the  total  effect 
is  that  of  a  continuous  curve,  hardly  distinguishable  from 
a  circle  drawn  with  the  compasses. 

Now  look  at  a  watch.     At  three  o'clock  everyone  knows 


28 


LINE 


Sketch  to  show  how  rhythm  and  continuity  are  maintained  through  the 
tangential  point  of  curves  of  like  or  unlike  orders,  so   that  inter- 
section is  avoided.    The  dotted  lines  show  the  order  of  the  curve. 


ABSTRACT  LINES  2Q 

that  the  hands  form  a  '*  right  angle,"  or  an  angle  of  90° — 
the  angle  at  which  one  line  is  at  its  greatest  opposition 
to  another,  as  at  the  corner  of  a  square. 

Every  minute  represents  6°. 

If  a  line  be  drawn  from  nine  o'clock  to  three  o'clock 
we  have  a  straight  horizontal  line,  and  from  twelve  to 
six  o'clock  a  vertical  line  dividing  it  into  two  equal  parts. 

If  we  draw  a  wide  V  of  equal  sides  from  14!  minutes 
to  twelve  Jo  14!  minutes  past,  it  will  make  an  internal 
angle  of  174° ;  the  divergence  from  the  horizontal  will 
be  3°  on  each  side,  or  half  a  minute,  the  total  divergence 
being  6°,  or  one  minute.  If  we  now  add  a  line  of  equal 
length  to  each  tip  of  the  V,  making  a  similar  angle,  and 
to  these  again  add  similar  lines,  we  shall  eventually 
arrive  at  a  6o-sided  figure,  just  as  though  we  had  joined 
up  the  60  points  that  mark  off  the  minutes  upon  the 
watch  face.  The  experiment  may  be  tried  with  a  box  of 
matches  or  cigarettes,  laying  them  end  to  end,  and 
noticing  how  soon  the  straight  units  appear  to  be  lost  in 
a  sense  of  curvature. 

What  practically  amounts  to  a  circle  will  have  been 
made  without  striking  from  a  centre  at  all. 

Let  us  now  take  a  square. 

By  cutting  off  the  corners  at  an  angle  of  45°  so  as  to 
make  a  regular  octagon  (while  curiously  enough  the  sides 
are  not  half  the  length  of  the  sides  of  the  square)  we 
immediately  approach  a  rough  suggestion  of  the  circle, 
which  is  intensified  with  each  halving  of  the  sides  and 
doubling  of  the  angles.  A  square  of  paper  may  be  taken 
and  the  corners  cut  off  or  folded  down  again  and  again 
for  this  experiment,  counting  the  number  of  cuts  or  folds 
before  it  becomes  impossible  to  "  circularize  "  the  square 
further. 

I  had  the  curiosity  to  work  out  the  proportions  at 


LINE 


which  the  straight  line  becomes  practically  indistinguish- 
able from  a  curve;  or,  in  other  words,  the  number  of 
points  necessary  to  establish  a  curve. 


Sketch  of  curves  composed  entirely  of  straight  lines  drawn  with  a  ruler. 

For  this  purpose  I  drew  a  6"  square,  in  which  I  in- 
scribed a  regular  octagon,  the  sides  of  which  work  out 
at  2|".  Then  by  cutting  off  the  corners  to  produce  a 
regular  i6-sided  figure  a  distinct  suggestion  of  a  circle 
was  arrived  at;  while  the  32-sided  figure  is  so  nearly 


ABSTRACT  LINES 


Curves  composed  entirely  of  straight  lines  drawn  with  a  rule.     Some 
angles  are  left  deliberately  obvious  to  the  eye. 

circular  that  it  requires  neat  workmanship  and  a  fine 
line  to  subdivide  the  angles  again  in  such  a  way  as  to 
discriminate  clearly  the  64  sides  from  the  parent  32. 
This  means  that  a  regular  polygon  of  32  sides  may  for 


LINE 


most  practical  purposes  of  the  artist  be  regarded  as  a 
circle,  which  may  be  interpreted  into  the  statement  that 
a  continuous  straight  line  which  is  divided  into  equal 
lengths,  each  length  diverging  nf°  from  the  last,  will 
eventually  meet,  and  when  viewed  as  a  whole  will  give 
a  distinct  sense  of  circularity.  If  the  degree  of  divergence 
be  diminished  so  that  a  figure  with  a  greater  number  of 
sides  (say  60  or  64)  is  produced,  the  eye  will  be  deceived. 
A  figure  of  128  sides  becomes  an  almost  theoretic 
circle,  though  the  divergence  of  each  side  from  its  neigh- 
bour amounts  to  2ff°,  or  almost  half  a  minute. 

In  practice  to  inscribe  a  figure  of  256  sides  having  a 
divergence  of  i^-f  °  would  be  a  task  of  great  delicacy  on 
any  manageable  scale,  and  in  the  rough  experiment 
made  an  impossibility,  as  any  multiple  of  64  would  have 
been  included  in  the  thickness  of  the  line  already  drawn. 
From  8  to  16  points  in  a  quadrant  will  therefore  be  a 

sufficient  number  of  points 
to  establish  to  arrive  at  a 
sense  of  continuous  curva- 
ture, and  frequently  it  will 
be  found  that  the  fewer 
points  established  the  hand- 
somer the  curve  will  appear. 
Watts 's  theory  that  largeness 
of  style  in  draughtsmanship 
depended  upon  a  flattening 
of  curvature,  as  though  a 
small  curve  were  made  up 
of  a  system  of  greater  curves,  is  exemplified  here. 

By  varying  the  length  of  the  straight  units  of  line,  or 
the  angle  of  diversion,  or  both,  any  conceivable  curve 
may  be  arrived  at,  as  may  be  experimentally  shown  with 
a  set  of  picture  wedges,  as  in  the  sketch. 


ABSTRACT    LINES 


33 


By  successive  reductions  in  the  length  of  line  while 
maintaining  the  same  angle  of  diversion  the  rate  of 
curvature  will  be  proportionately  increased,  as  well  as 
the  smoothness  of  the  curve,  which  will,  if  sufficiently 
continued,  from  a  straight  stem  rapidly  become  spiral. 

Before  proceeding  to  draw  curves  with  a  free  hand,  it 
is  well  to  become  acquainted  with  these  simple  facts,  and 
to  carry  out  exercises  with  a  pencil  and  a  ruler,  first  in  the 
production  of  circles  by  joining  up  the  ends  of  a  number 
of  radii,  and  next  by  breaking  down  the  triangle,  square, 
or  other  regular-sided  figure  by  arithmetical  progression. 


Having  arrived  at  the  conclusion  that  anything  beyond 
32  points  at  regular  angles  and  intervals  to  each  other 
will,  if  joined  by  straight  lines,  be  sufficient  to  establish  the 
sense  of  circularity,  and  that  therefore  8  or  more  such  points 
will  establish  a  quadrant,  we  may  form  some  idea  of  the 
number  of  points  requisite  to  establish  any  curve  (Fig.  i). 

Without  going  into  the  mathematical  principle  of  the 
ellipse,  but  regarding  it  roughly  either  as  a  circle  com- 
pressed at  one  diameter,  or  evenly  extended  at  another, 
we  may  exercise  our  sense  of  curvature  by  first  making 
an  oblong  or  rectangular  figure,  and  proceeding  to  break 
down  the  angles,  much  as  we  did  in  the  case  of  the  square 
(Fig.  2). 


34 


LINE 


The  ellipse  and  the  oval  are  frequently  confused  on 
account  of  their  similarity,  but  to  arrive  at  the  true 
oval  by  means  of  breaking  down  angles  or  cutting  off 
corners,  a  quadrilateral  of  two  equal  and  two  unequal 
sides  should  be  drawn,  the  unequal  sides  being  parallel 
to  each  other,  according  to  the  desired  proportions  of  the 
oval  (Fig.  3). 

On  the  same  principle  we  may  arrive  at  the  spiral 


curve,  or  volute.  Let  us  begin  with  a  tall  upright  line, 
as  tall  as  our  paper  conveniently  allows,  and  at  right 
angles  to  it  at  one  end  draw  a  shorter  horizontal  line, 
then  a  shorter  line  at  right  angles,  and  so  on,  so  that 
we  arrive  at  the  figure  of  the  Greek  fret,  which  is  then 
broken  down  by  cutting  off  the  angles  as  in  the  preceding 
examples  (Figs.  5,  6). 

It  will  be  seen  how  the  curve  is  accelerated  by  the 
progressive  shortening  of  the  straight  lines  composing  it, 
while  the  angles  are  kept  similar.  If  the  width  of  the 
angles  is  reduced  still  more,  rapid  curvature  is  the  result. 

By  increasing  the  angle  of  divergence  the  curve  will 
become  more  rapid  or  even  violent.  If  too  much 
increased  the  angle  will  become  obvious  to  the  eye,  and 
the  sense  of  curvature  be  lost,  but  a  divergence  of  6°  or 
even  12°  (of  from  a  minute  to  two  minutes  of  move- 


ABSTRACT  LINES  35 

ment  of  the  hands  of  a  watch)  will  maintain  the  character 
of  a  curve  if  there  be  a  sufficient  number  of  these 
divergences. 

In  the  stealthy  employment  of  a  scarcely  perceptible 
angle  often  lies  the  life  and  beauty  of  a  curve,  and 
its  character  of  vigour 
or  languor,  its  speed  or 
slowness. 

It  will  be  seen  that 
only  two  generations  from 
the  square  are  needed  for 
a  figure  to  acquire  much 
more  the  character  of  a 
circle  than  of  a  square. 
The  third  generation  from 
the  square  —  its  great- 
grandson  —  the  3  2 -sided 
figure,  is  already  to  all 
intents  and  purposes  a 
circle,  though  requiring 
a  little  polish.  By  the 
next  generation  all  trace 

of    the    harshness     of     its  Sketch  suggesting  that  even  within 

...  measurable  distances  the  curvature 

origin   IS   Obliterated,    and  of  a  true  circle   may  become   prac- 

bevnnrl      thk      Hiffprpnrps  tically     indistinguishable     from     a 

Dev01                                          'es  straight  line,  and  that  a  circle  struck 

become   indistinguishable.  at  infinity  is  a  straight  line. 

It  would  be  a  nice  though  fairly  simple  calculation  to 
work  out  the  exact  divergence  from  the  circle  struck  at 
six  miles  from  Charing  Cross  of  one  side  of  a  regular 
128-sided  figure  inscribed  within  it,  but  it  would  be 
fairly  safe  to  wager  that  there  is  hardly  a  micrometer 
made  that  would  detect  the  curvature  in  a  yard  cut  from 
a  circle  mathematically  true. 


Ill 

(Continued) 
FREEHAND   DRAWING  OF  ABSTRACT   LINES 

HAVING  now  acquired  some  knowledge  of  the  con- 
stitution of  the  various  curves,  considered  as  combinations 
of  straight  units,  we  may  proceed  to  exercise  our  know- 
ledge by  practising  the  production  of  such  curves  freehand, 
without  mechanical  aid. 

If  a  large  Roman  I  and  a  large  O  be  made  with  a  J  pen 
handled  as  a  chisel  edge  for  the  finest  parts  of  the  line 
and  gradually  presenting  the  flat  to  the  paper  for  the 
thick  parts,  it  will  be  seen  that  since  the  I  consists  of 
a  straight  line,  and  the  O  as  drawn  with  a  pen  consists 
of  a  circle  in  contour,  and  contains  an  ellipse,  we  find 
in  these  three  of  the  most  important  elements  in  abstract 
line,  already  discussed. 

From  combinations  of  these  lines  or  parts  of  them,  all 
the  remainder  of  the  alphabet  is  formed,  as  A  E  F  H  I 
K  L  M  N  T  V  W  X  Y  Z,  all  straight  letters ;  C  O  Q  S, 
all  curved ;  while  B  D  G  J  P  R  U  are  combinations. 

There  can  be  no  better  or  pleasanter  exercise  for  the 
hand  than  the  formation  of  these  letters  with  a  pen  if  a 
good  model  be  chosen,  and  if  the  pen  be  properly  handled. 
An  ordinary  J  pen  should  be  taken,  if  the  special  pens 
made  for  scribes  are  not  available ;  then  holding  the  pen 
flat  to  the  paper  a  bold  down  stroke  should  be  made  with 
the  full  breadth  of  the  pen,  but  without  applying  pressure. 
For  practice  several  of  these  down  strokes  should  be  made, 
and  the  pen  then  turned  sideways  so  that  the  chisel  edge 

36 


Ruled  lines  vary  little 
from  each  other  except 
in  thickness,  and  con- 
sequently may  give  a 
mechanical  effect :  but 
except  for  this  there 
is  no  immorality  or 
"  cheating  "  involved 
in  the  use  of  a  ruler 
where  it  will  serve  the 
purpose. 


Freehand  slowly  drawn  Deliberately  wavy 
straight  lines  have  a  lines  are  useful  for 
character  of  their  own,  many  purposes,  par- 
being  almost  inevitably  ticularly  to  avoid  a 


slightly  waved. 


mechanical  effect. 


4 

Swiftly  drawn  freehand 
lines  have  a  smooth- 
ness approaching  the 
mechanical,  and  tend 
towards  curvature. 
Hard  smooth  forms  are 
often  best  expressed  by 
a  swift  line. 


5  6 

Lines  varying  in  thick-     Lines  gradated  at  both 
ness  in  their_course.       ends,  being  thickest  in 

the  middle. 


8 

Characteristic  line'of  a 
chisel    edge    rhythmi- 
^      cally  employed. 


Lines  thick  at  one  end 

and  thin  at  the  other 

for  emphasis  and  grad- 

tion  respectively. 


Lines 


7 

thick 
end. 


at   each 


A  SUMMARY  OF  THE  POSSIBLE  VARIA- 
TIONS IN  THE  QUALITY  OF  A  LINE 

37 


38  LINE 

is  presented  to  the  paper,  to  make  a  series  of  fine  strokes 
at  an  angle  of  about  45°  to  the  horizontal. 

A  combination  of  fine  and  heavy  strokes  should  then 
be  essayed,  for  instance,  by  drawing  a  series  of  large 
Roman  A's. 

Do  not  press  upon  the  pen,  but  notice  how  the 
design  of  the  letter  has  largely  grown  out  of  the  natural 
and  most  easy  manner  of  holding  the  pen  itself.  It  is 
quite  outside  a  good  calligraphist's  methods  to  "  paint 
up  "  the  thickness  of  a  letter — he  makes  the  pen  do  it 
for  him  first  by  choosing  the  correct  type  of  instrument, 
and  then  using  it  in  the  right  way.  Don't  fight  your 
pen ;  take  Walton's  advice  about  the  worm — "  handle 
him  as  though  you  loved  him."  More  than  a  worm,  a 
pen  will  turn. 

Now  make  a  series  of  large  O's.  These  may  be  made 
in  two  strokes,  both  downwards,  one  from  the  top  slightly 
to  the  left,  the  second  from  the  same  point,  to  meet  the 
first  at  each  end.  This  is  to  avoid  splutter.  It  requires 
a  light  hand  to  move  the  pen  upwards  without  catching 
in  the  paper ;  with  a  sharply-pointed  pen  no  wise  person 
will  take  the  risk  more  than  once.  Gently  does  it. 

A  well-shaped  P  Q  R  S  U  should  then  be  attempted, 
all  of  various  sizes. 

After  drawing  an  O  somewhat  small  and  as  nearly 
circular  as  possible,  and  using  a  broad  pen  as  has  been 
directed,  it  will  be  noticed  that  the  included  space  will 
form  a  very  passable  ellipse ;  and  it  will  be  a  good  exercise 
to  endeavour  to  draw  a  series  of  O's  starting  with  a  circular 
one,  and  each  succeeding  one  based  on  the  inside  curvature 
of  the  last,  so  that  eventually  we  arrive  at  a  very  com- 
pressed curve. 

Exercises    should     then   be    carried    out    in    drawing 


FREEHAND   DRAWING   OF   ABSTRACT   LINES 


39 


ellipses   with    the   long    axis    horizontal    and    in    other 
directions  as  in  Fig.  i. 


A  very  frequent  failing  in  the  drawing  of  ellipses,  is 
that  instead  of  turning  well  at  the  ends,  the  two  long 


2  3 

sides  come  to  a  sharp  point,  or  very  nearly  so,  instead 
of  forming  a  continuous  and  regular  curve.  This  is  a 
highly  important  matter,  not  only  because  the  figure 


40  LINE 

is  not  so  graceful  in  itself,  but  that,  in  the  drawing  of 
cylindrical  solids,  it  is  essential  that  full  value  should 
be  given  to  this  turn,  otherwise  they  will  appear  to  be 
flattened  in  depth,  and  to  come  to  an  edge,  as  in  Fig.  2 . 
The  further  above  or  below  the  level  of  the  eye  the  more 
nearly  circular  will  the  ellipse  appear;  so  that  the 
common  error  exemplified  in  Fig.  3  should  be  noted  for 
avoidance.  It  is  well  to  acquire  some  facility  in  the 
drawing  of  this  curve  in  every  position,  and  in  varying 
sizes  and  proportions. 

The  ellipse  arises  from  a  section  through  the  axis  of  a 
right  cone,  and  varies  in  proportion  according  to  the  angle 
of  the  section.  From  this  to  the  egg  form  is  a  natural  step. 

This  is  probably  the  curve  most  generally  found  in 
natural  forms,  either  singly  or  in  combination,  so  that 
in  some  ways  it  is  the  most  important  of  all.  It  is  closely 
related  to  the  ellipse  and  the  parabolic  and  hyperbolic 
curves,  and  might  well  be  thought  to  be  a  section  of 
the  right  cone  like  them;  but  this  is  not  the  case. 

Connected  with  this  is  the  spiral  curve,  such  as  is 
made  by  a  conical  spring  or  screw.  This  will  be  less 
frightening  in  practice  if  it  is  realized  in  the  mind  much 
as  a  series  of  capital  M's  or  E's  as  many  people  write 
them,  or  as  a  child  draws  smoke  coming  out  of  a  chimney, 
and  the  hand  exercised  in  making  the  curve  with  its 
free  and  natural  rhythm,  without  too  much  sense  of 
responsibility  to  begin  with,  but  taking  the  risk  of  failure 
quite  light-heartedly. 

In  script,  indeed,  which  arises  from  the  readiest  method 
of  combining  the  various  forms  of  letters  into  words, 
and  curvature  affording  the  most  rapid  means  of  transi- 
tion, we  find  the  straight  letters  gradually  becoming 
curved,  and  a  natural  rhythm  is  produced  by  the  hand 
itself  taking  the  line  of  least  resistance. 


FREEHAND   DRAWING   OF  ABSTRACT  LINES 


These  forms  arise  only  from  the  use  of  the  pen,  and 
bear  no  reference  to  the  use  of  the  chisel,  where  the  con- 
necting stroke  would  be  a  most  laborious  undertaking. 
To  see  imitation  script  over  shop  fronts  carried  out  in 
carved  and  gilded  lettering  is  a  perpetual  affront  to  a 
well-formed  taste,  even  though  it  may  be  unable  to  give 
its  reason  off- 
hand ;  and  "Sacred 
to  the  Memory  of  " 
carved  upon  a 
headstone  with  all 
a  writing-master's 
flourish  is  a 
desecration. 

A  rhythmical 
combination  of  all 
the  curves  is  to 
be  found  in  the 
musical  sign  of  the 
treble  clef,  as 
here  indicated. 

The  student  who 
has  mastered  these 
curves  may  con- 
fidently proceed  to 
apply  them  either 
to  the  composition 
of  ornamental  de- 
sign, or  to  the  representation  of  objects,  since  'he  has 
already  dealt  with  every  element  of  curvature  to  be  met 
with;  prpportion  and  arrangement  are  the  only  lions 
in  his  path,  so  far  as  drawing  is  concerned,  apart  from 
emotional  expression. 


FREEHAND     DRAWING     OF     NATURAL     FORMS,     CONSISTING 
MAINLY  OF  PLANE  SURFACES  OR  SINGLE  LINES 

HITHERTO  consideration  has  been  directed  entirely  to 
ideal,  non-representative  curvatures  and  abstract  lines. 

Though  the  elements  studied  appear  to  be  so  few,  it 
is  out  of  these  that  the  infinite  variety  of  form  in  Nature 
is  built  up;  and  Art  itself,  the  last  and  highest  product 
of  Nature. 

The  simplest  natural  objects  to  study  from  the  draughts- 
man's point  of  view  will  be  such  as  most  nearly  approx- 
imate to  the  two  dimensions  in  which  he  himself  works — 
length  and  breadth.  Of  course,  even  a  leaf,  a  feather 
and  a  butterfly's  wing  have  thickness,  but  it  is  so  slight 
as  to  be  generally  negligible,  being  frequently  less  than 
that  of  the  line  used  in  demarcation. 

One  of  the  first  things  noticeable  in  natural  objects  is 
that,  while  they  appear  to  be  made  to  pattern,  it  is  very 
rare  to  find  two  objects  exactly  alike,  except  in  general 
plan.  Symmetry  is  there  in  the  main,  but  with  minute 
differences  and  divergences;  in  the  case  of  plant  form, 
for  instance,  according  to  conditions  of  soil,  climate,  or 
other  accidents. 

It  will  be  seen  in  the  study  of  natural  form  how 
generally  the  curvature  is  made  up  on  some  such  prin- 
ciple as  that  upon  which  the  circle  was  built  up,  of  a 
multitude  of  sides  rather  than  from  a  simple  single  curve. 

The  simplest  form  of  leaf  may,  to  a  hasty  glance, 
appear  to  be  composed  of  a  straight  and  stiff  midrib  in- 

42 


In  Nature  there  is  generally  to  be  found  under  the  main  rhythmical 

curve  a  minor  recurrent  rhythm,  full  of  incident  and  variation.     The 

mathematical  simplicity  of  the  rainbow  is  not  frequently  met  with. 

43 


44  LINE 

tersecting  the  arcs  of  two  circles,  but  upon  closer  observa- 
tion many  varieties  in  the  curvature  are  likely  to  appear. 
The  midrib  itself  may  be  composed  of  a  series  of  slight 
curves,  and  the  outline  of  the  leaf  full  of  minor  unexpected 
oddities  that  in  sum  may  constitute  its  chief  beauty. 

To  find  an  apparently  rotund  and  sweeping  curve 
made  up  of  lines  almost  straight  at  unexpected  angles,  or 
a  line  that  is  almost  straight  full  of  delicate  incident,  is 
the  best  corrective  to  a  hand  inclined  to  dominate  a 
drawing  with  the  too  glib  flourishes  of  the  writing  or 
drawing  master,  which  contain  no  pause  and  no  variety, 
becoming  mechanical  and  machine-like  in  their  accuracy 
with  no  element  of  surprise.  Nature  rarely  yields  to 
such;  she  generally  dwells  lovingly  upon  her  line,  with 
many  a  slight  pause  and  turn;  nor  is  the  line  often 
flabby  or  relaxed  or  turgid,  but  firm  and  strenuous.  Even 
the  most  luscious  peach  or  plum  has  considerable  flatten- 
ings  and  varieties  in  its  curvature,  and  the  pulpiest 
orange  may  be  far  from  round.  Nature,  as  artist,  appears 
to  work  much  more  by  hand  than  by  machinery;  for  in 
spite  of  her  power  and  the  perpetual  repetition  of  kinds 
and  seasons,  she  does  not  turn  out  an  eternal  series  of 
exact  replicas,  but  each  is  subject  to  accidents  of  time 
and  place,  like  those  of  any  other  artist.  Her  works  are 
the  result  of  many  experiments,  trials  and  compromises 
between  apparently  conflicting  laws  and  interests.  Fre- 
quently it  is  possible  to  remark  how  the  main  intention 
has  partially  miscarried  or  been  entirely  frustrated 
because  her  elbow  has  been  jogged.  Evolution  seems  to 
consist  in  the  making  and  discarding  of  an  interminable 
succession  of  sketches  and  studies,  each  one  of  which 
might  be  described  as  a  masterpiece  until  the  next  comes 
along,  and  the  sketch  for  it  is  destroyed. 


FREEHAND  DRAWING  OF  NATURAL  FORMS      45 

While  it  is  frequently  necessary  that  the  artist  should 
simplify  or  summarize  the  works  of  Nature,  presenting 
us  with  the  central  essential  fact  rather  than  refining  it 
away  by  an  over-emphasis  upon  variations  and  subtleties, 
these  should  not  be  overlooked. 

While  wishing  to  insist  on  a  close  study  of  Nature,  it 
is  not  intended  to  inculcate  a  photographic  or  imitative 
reproduction  of  the  external  facts  observed.  Equally 
with  Nature,  Art  and  its  purposes  and  conventions  must 
be  taken  into  account,  with  the  necessity  for  selection 
from  the  mass,  the  choice  of  the  right  means  to  employ, 
in  order  to  present  the  selection  when  made,  and  the 
method  of  that  presentation  either  simple  or  complex. 

If  the  laws  underlying  appearances  be  studied  the 
variety  of  Nature  will  be  better  appreciated,  and  conse- 
quently better  displayed  by  the  artist  when  he  deals 
with  appearances  for  their  own  sake.  If  appearance 
only  be  studied,  the  artist  becomes  dependent  upon 
things  external  to  himself,  and  is  unlikely  to  arrive  at 
the  power  to  combine  or  compose  unlike  things  into  a 
harmonious  whole.  The  laws  of  growth  and  construc- 
tion, the  "  how  "  of  things,  are  at  least  as  important  to 
the  artist  as  the  appearances  of  them  under  given  con- 
ditions or  accidents  of  light  or  position,  interesting  as 
these  particulars  may  be :  indeed  to  the  draughtsman 
logical  construction  takes  a  higher  place  than  accuracy 
of  appearance. 

It  is  the  degree  and  number  of  divergences  from  the 
norm  or  "  average,"  if  these  can  be  established,  that  yields 
not  only  beauty  but  interest  and  character  to  all  things. 
Bacon,  in  his  essay  on  Beauty,  insists  upon  a  "  degree  of 
strangeness  in  the  proportions."  The  "  perfect,"  if  there  is 
such  a  thing,  is  hardly  beautiful  or  interesting.  A  "  perfect 


46  LINE 

gentleman  "  or  "  perfect  lady  "  is  called  for  by  a  crude 
or  inexperienced  mind  in  a  novelette,  but  not  in  Shake- 
speare, who  shows  us  divergence  rather  than  conformity 
with  a  stock  specimen,  the  interest  generally  deepening 
with  the  extent  of  the  divergence,  while  yet  the  main 
curve,  the  credibility,  of  the  character,  is  maintained. 

There  are  also  several  natural  forms,  such  as  certain 
kinds  of  grass  and  reeds,  so  slender  and  graceful  that 
they  may  frequently  be  represented  by  the  use  of  a  single 
rather  than  a  double  line.  Distant  trees  may  sometimes 
be  better  expressed  by  such  means. 

In  most  cases  of  growing  plants  and  trees,  it  is  the 
best  plan  to  draw  them  from  the  ground  upwards,  in  order 
to  get  the  sense  of  life,  growth  and  spring  into  the  line. 

It  looks  as  though  Turner  drew  his  trees  in  this  manner, 
for  they  always  appear  to  be  growing  out  of  the  earth, 
and  not  hung  by  their  leaves  out  of  the  sky,  or  just  stuck 
into  the  ground  without  roots,  like  telegraph  poles,  as 
so  often  they  appear  in  pictures. 

Landscape  painters  are  so  preoccupied  with  problems 
of  mass,  light,  air,  tone,  or  colour,  that  their  drawing  is 
sometimes  lifeless  and  stiff,  since  they  draw  the  inessential 
shape  rather  than  the  necessary  construction. 

Like  Turner,  the  Japanese  give  invariably  this  sense 
of  life  and  growth  by  the  vivacity  of  their  draughtsman- 
ship, which  never  appears  as  though  it  had  been  "  blocked 
out  "  in  mass,  or  even  thought  of  in  that  way,  but  to  be 
based  upon  the  principles  of  construction  and  growth. 

The  use  of  the  brush-tip  for  line  drawing  is  also  to  be 
taken  into  account  as  the  frequently  deciding  factor  in 
the  Japanese  line ;  as  the  flexibility  of  the  brush  demands 
constant  alertness  of  handling  and  consequent  vivacity 
of  attention  on  the  part  of  the  artist. 


THE   THIRD   AND   FOURTH   DIMENSIONS 

APART  from  the  more  limited  view  of  perspective  as 
the  projection  of  solid  objects  upon  a  plane  surface,  it 
may  properly  be  denned  as  being  the  expression  of  the 
relative  position  of  the  observer  to  the  object  observed. 
With  every  movement  on  the  part  of  one  or  the  other, 
change  takes  place  in  this  relation,  so  that  it  is  generally 
thought  necessary  for  the  artist  to  take  up  or  imagine  a 
fixed  moment  in  time  and  a  fixed  position  in  space  by 
which  all  parts  of  his  picture  are  related  one  to  another, 
and  to  himself.  Time  is  nothing  but  movement,  whereas 
the  pictorial  conception  most  usually  adopted  is  static. 
In  early  days  many  of  these  relations  were  either  over- 
looked or  ignored,  and  it  cannot  be  denied  that  the 
introduction  of  the  expression  of  the  third  dimension 
into  pictorial  art,  while  adding  another  string  to  the 
bow  of  the  artist,  has  misled  him  as  frequently  as  not 
rather  to  a  display  of  science  than  of  art,  while  his  task 
has  become  more  complex  with  the  added  complexity  of 
the  means  placed  at  his  disposal. 

A  scientific  attempt  at  truth  to  appearances  took  the 
place  of  a  quite  happy  understanding  that  Art  was  a 
convention  in  which  symbols  and  not  realities  were 
employed;  but  with  the  introduction  of  a  close  realism, 
so  close  as  even  to  attempt  deceptiveness  of  appearance, 
the  symbol  began  to  lose  its  force. 

The  world  became  tired  of  the  perfected  conventions 

47 


4»  LINE 

of  pattern,  and  welcomed  each  step  forward  in  the  direction 
of  naturalness  of  appearance,  until  every  competent  art 
student  could,  if  he  would,  paint  a  bunch  of  grapes  like 
that  (probably  fabled  and  certainly  horrible)  bunch  by 
Zeuxis  that  took  in  the  fly,  and  has  taken  in  countless 
people,  like  flies,  as  to  the  proper  functions  of  Art  ever  since. 

However,  that  was  the  way  of  the  world,  and  the  way 
of  the  artist  in  it.  Increasing  realism  and  naturalism — 
"  copyism  "  we  may  call  it,  if  we  may  coin  an  ugly  word — 
ran  through  all  the  arts,  till  it  was  difficult  to  distinguish 
painting  from  a  photograph,  or  stage  or  novel  dialogue 
from  a  gramophone  record  of  a  conversation. 

The  true  convention  of  Art,  apart  from  the  convention 
temporarily  (i.  e.  fashionably)  uppermost,  was  in  danger 
of  being  lost.  Even  "  Impressionism,"  that  staid  effort 
to  reassert  the  personality  of  the  artist,  while  endeavour- 
ing with  considerable  success  to  absorb  all  that  was  new 
in  the  way  of  scientific  analysis  of  light  and  movement, 
was  regarded  at  first  as  revolutionary;  but  this  was 
but  a  beginning.  The  public  is  now  so  familiar  with 
Impressionism  that  it  is  looked  upon  as  "  academic." 

Even  "  Post-Impressionism "  is  old-fashioned,  and 
Cubism,  Vorticism,  Expressionism  and  the  other  -isms 
are  chasing  after  it.  All  of  these  contain  varying  degrees 
of  sincerity  and  truth,  and  will  survive  in  accordance 
with  what  amount  they  possess.  An  exhibition  of  works 
by  the  Italian  Futurists  held  in  London  some  years  ago 
was  interesting,  and  (how  they  would  hate  it  !)  "  highly 
respectable,"  as  being  firmly  stood,  apart  from  a  good 
deal  of  frothy  anarchistic  nonsense,  upon  a  quite  bourgeois 
scientific  basis,  which  we  may  examine  under  this  head 
of  perspective. 

A  man  in  a  field  may  see  a  brook  in  front  of  him. 


THE    THIRD   AND   FOURTH   DIMENSIONS  49 

"  Absolutely  charming  landscape,"  he  ejaculates.  "  If 
anything  can  be  more  absolutely  beautiful  I  would  go  a 
long  way  to  see  it."  Looking  in  the  other  direction  he 
sees  a  fiery  bull  charging  at  him.  Turning  again  to  the 
brook,  he  starts  to  run,  with  a  mental  image  of  a  snorting 
bull,  based  upon  a  fleeting  optical  view  rapidly  enlarging 
in  his  mind,  and  a  brook  simultaneously  occupying  a 
larger  and  larger  share  of  his  field  of  optical  vision. 

"  Can  I  jump  the  beautiful  brook  before  the  horrid 
bull  butts  in  behind?  "  is  the  artist's  thought  as  he 
runs,  love  and  hatred  battling  in  his  mind. 

Here  are  two  forms  of  vivid  and  simultaneous  vision, 
each  intensified  by  emotion  to  its  utmost  stretch. 

How  is  such  a  problem  to  be  tackled  by  the  artist  if,  of 
course,  it  be  regarded  as  proper  subject-matter  for  pictorial 
Art  at  all  ?  Must  he  disregard  his  own  self-consciousness  ? 

The  brook  that  at  one  moment  was  beautiful  will  be 
hateful  until  he  is  upon  the  other  side  of  it.  Its  width 
means  exactly  opposite  things  according  to  the  point 
and  moment  of  view,  though  the  brook  is  practically 
constant,  while  the  bull  is  rapidly  becoming  an  ogre 
filling  not  only  the  background  of  his  thought,  but  chang- 
ing, as  we  see,  the  entire  emotional  outlook  upon  the 
scene  presented  to  the  eye. 

Is  the  artist  then  to  paint  the  brook  or  the  bull  separately 
without  reference  or  relation  to  his  emotional  stress  when 
viewing  them,  or  shall  he  endeavour  to  present  not  only 
what  the  eye  sees  in  front,  but  the  equally  vivid  content 
of  his  mind  ?  He  can't,  of  course,  do  it  then  and  there, 
but  when  he  remembers  his  emotion  in  tranquillity  in 
his  studio ? 

A  cinematograph  might,  of  course,  as  a  detached 
spectator,  produce  a  highly  exciting  film  of  such  a  subject 


50  LINE 

in  its  physical  aspects,  which  also  lend  themselves 
admirably  to  the  art  of  Mr.  Frank  Reynolds  of  Punch. 

An  old  tapestry  designer  might  give  a  series  of  incidents 
as  happening  simultaneously  upon  the  field  of  his  design, 
but  even  this  will  be  from  a  detached  spectator's  point 
of  view. 

The  painter  or  the  critic  who  maintains  that  the 
artist's  business  is  only  with  what  he  sees  with  his  eyes, 
will  insist,  of  course,  upon  his  painting  either  the  bull  or 
the  brook  at  a  chosen  moment  of  optical  vision. 

Blake  might  externalize  himself  and  present  his 
emanation  as  pursued  by  an  ogre  across  asphodel  and 
the  rivers  of  "  this  green  and  pleasant  land." 

Yet  it  may  be  said  that  while  all  of  these  methods 
are  true  in  part,  none  of  them  yields  the  exact  and  most 
exciting  record  of  a  most  exciting  moment. 

The  Futurist  endeavours  to  solve  the  problem  by 
superposing  one  picture  upon  another  in  such  a  way  that 
the  sum  of  impressions  shall  appear  at  a  glance,  and  in 
this  he  is  entirely  logical.  The  only  question  is  whether 
he  is  aesthetically  justified. 

He  is  not  content  with  the  fixed  point  of  view  either  in 
time  or  place  upon  which  the  hitherto  laws  of  perspective 
are  based,  but  demands  a  new  and  complex  convention  for 
the  expression  of  his  complex  emotion  in  the  presence  of 
external  facts. 

If  for  a  moment  we  will  imgaine  that  instead  of 
movable  eyes  in  a  movable  head,  by  which  we  are  enabled 
to  see  all  round  our  standpoint  in  successive  moments  of 
time,  we  had  eyes  all  round  our  heads  recording  simul- 
taneously in  the  brain,  we  should  readily  enough  accept 
the  Futurist  attitude  as  an  almost  normal  method  of 
presentation. 


THE   THIRD   AND   FOURTH   DIMENSIONS  51 

It  may  be,  however,  sometimes  even  more  complex 
than  this,  since  there  is  no  reason  why,  if  more  than  a 
single  point  of  view  be  introduced  into  a  picture,  successive 
or  separated  instants  of  time  should  not  be  insisted  upon. 

By  such  means,  not  only  those  images  presented  to 
the  eye  at  a  given  moment,  but  those  present  to  the 
mind  either  in  the  memory,  the  sense  of  the  past,  or  its 
combining  and  so  forecasting  faculty,  i.  e.  the  sense  of 
the  future,  may  become  relevant  to  the  pictorial  state- 
ment; and  we  arrive  at  an  expression  which,  though 
extremely  complex,  may  approach  more  nearly  to  the 
absolute  than  the  mere  statement  of  the  visible  at  a 
given  moment  from  a  given  point  of  view. 

There  is  bound  to  be  a  great  overlapping  of  realism 
and  idealism  in  such  work — the  expression  at  once  of 
the  present,  the  past  and  the  future — of  fact  and  idea, 
in  which,  while  pictorial  unity,  as  it  has  been  generally 
understood,  is  hard  to  find,  a  higher  unity  may  eventually 
be  achieved,  a  perspective  of  the  whole  mind — of  time 
as  well  as  space,  and  not  of  the  outward-looking  eye 
alone. 

Crude  attempts  in  this  direction  have  comically  enough 
been  highly  popular  in  England ;  the  Futurist  has  only 
endeavoured  to  bring  about  in  a  scientific  manner  a 
synthesis  such  as  Phiz  produced  when  he  drew  Tom 
Pinch  dreaming  his  dreams  at  the  organ — and  here  is  the 
meeting  point  of  the  extremes  of  Italian  scientific  art  and 
naively  inartistic  British  sentimentality  ! 

It  is  probable  that  the  artists  had  arrived  in  their 
travels  at  a  conception  of  the  value  of  relativity  before 
the  scientists ;  but  this  is  as  it  should  be,  since  it  is  their 
own  relation  to  things  seen  that  has  concerned  them. 
The  nearest  approach  to  certainty  of  statement  is  that 


52  LINE 

of  our  own  relation  or  reaction  to  something  else,  and 
it  is  the  artist  who  has  been  at  work  on  this  from  time 
immemorial — to  find  and  fix  himself  and  his  place  in  the 
general  flux,  and  to  immortalize  his  moment. 

In  connection  with  the  fixed  point  in  space  and  time, 
as  regards  the  artistic  outlook,  the  writer  may  be  per- 
mitted to  recall  a  summer  of  long  ago  when  painting  as  a 
boy  with  his  father  at  Normanhurst,  near  Battle.  The 
father  was  working  upon  a  large  canvas  of  a  panoramic 
view  from  the  terrace,  while  the  boy  had  the  run  of  the 
stables,  where  the  horses  interested  him  much  more  than 
the  landscape. 

His  father's  methods  of  work  were  extremely  precise; 
he  outlined  the  entire  panorama  topographically  upon 
the  canvas,  including  every  hill  and  tree  right  away  into 
the  distance,  and  the  boy  assisted  in  setting  out  the 
perspective  of  the  tiles  upon  the  terrace  and  drawing  the 
flower-tubs  in  the  foreground.  When  this  was  complete 
the  painting  began,  and  was  carried  through  from  day  to 
day  with  the  same  careful  and  minute  accuracy  until 
the  summer  holiday  was  over. 

While  he  was  occupying  himself  in  the  identification 
of  Telham  Hill  in  sunshine  or  under  a  cloud,  and  doubtless 
thinking  "  across  this  hill  the  Normans  advanced,  while 
in  that  valley  —  "  and  so  on,  tracing  out  the  progress 
of  the  Battle  of  Hastings  as  the  soldier  in  him  would — 
"  then  Harold  fell,"  the  youngster  was  drawing  or  painting 
away  at  horses. 

There  was  a  pony,  "  Killeauea,"  named  after  the 
volcano  by  the  first  Lady  Brassey,  that  struck  his  fancy ; 
and  he  was  making  a  careful  study  of  it,  held  steadily 
facing  him  by  a  pair  of  pillar  reins,  so  that  its  head  was 
fairly  close  up,  and  the  rest  foreshortened.  He  was  no 


THE  THIRD--  AND   FOURTH   DIMENSIONS  53 

end  pleased  with  the  result  until  the  stud-groom  looked 
over  his  shoulder.  '  Yes — the  'ead's  all  right,  but  where's 
'is  barrel,  sir?  " 

He  explained  foreshortening  to  the  groom  as  well  as 
he  could.  "  You  can't  see  any  more  of  it  than  I've 
painted  if  you  look  from  here,"  was  as  nearly  convincing 
an  argument  as  he  could  muster.  "That  may  be;  but 
you  come  and  look  round  'ere;  there  it  is  right  enough  !  " 
and  he  insisted  on  proving  that  there  it  was  round  there 
right  enough. 

From  this  was  eventually  deduced  the  reason  why 
Herring  and  other  horse  painters  chose  the  broadside 
view,  as  offering  less  of  a  puzzle  to  the  "  horse  sense  "  of 
their  patrons.  Though  why  the  question  as  to  "  where's 
'is  chest  ?  "  never  seems  to  have  occurred  to  them,  does 
not  appear  even  now.  It  is  true  that  the  young  artist 
felt  humiliated  in  that  he  was  unable  to  oblige  the  groom 
with  what  he  so  reasonably  clamoured  for.  He  would 
have  done  so  if  he  had  known  how.  But  his  father  and 
all  he  stood  for,  and  all  tradition  behind  him,  would  have 
thought  him  mad. 

Two  points  of  view  were  here  called  for. 

As  to  the  moment  of  time.  His  father's  picture  went 
on,  with  continual  daily  accuracy,  while  the  green  of 
summer  was  rapidly  changing  to  the  brown  and  yellow 
of  autumn.  If  it  were  possible  to  remove  it  strip  by 
strip,  underneath  the  uppermost  surface  might  be  found 
layer  after  layer  recording  such  change  as  it  became 
noticeable,  like  a  painted  diary  of  the  vanished  summer. 
How  many  pictures  of  lovingly  recorded  beauty  lie  under 
the  topmost  skin  of  the  still  unfinished  picture  of  early 
autumn  I  do  not  know,  but  there  is  a  great  deal  of  my 
father  buried  in  it.  He  was  after  something  which  his 


54  LINE 

conscientious  pursuance  of  a  method  would  not  give  him. 
Time  beat  him,  or  rather  his  method,  daily  on  land,  and 
hourly  in  the  sky. 

These  two  examples  may  serve  to  show  what 
the  Futurist  apparently  means  when  he  speaks  of 
"  divisionism." 

To  show  the  perspective  in  space  of  the  front  view  of 
the  horse  at  the  same  time  and  on  the  same  canvas  as 
his  consciousness  of  the  length  of  his  barrel  is  put  on 
record,  presents  a  nice  problem  in  pictorial  statement; 
and  to  present  a  picture  of  the  changing  colour  of  a  season 
as  it  presents  itself  in  a  perspective  of  time  upon  a  single 
canvas  amounts  to  much  the  same.  That  such  a  problem 
in  synthesis  admits  of  a  pictorial  solution  I  am  not 
prepared  to  deny ;  and,  since  the  mind  of  the  stud-groom 
required  the  barrel  as  well  as  the  chest  of  the  pony  which 
was  offered,  and  my  father's  method  required  the  record  of 
the  changing  time  and  season,  it  appears  possible  that  the 
art  of  the  "  Futurist  "  will  only  be  "  filling  a  long-felt 
want"  as  soon  as  its  terms  of  "divisionism"  become 
generally  understood. 

In  the  meantime  most  will  plant  their  cabbages,  and 
cultivate  their  gardens,  content  to  be  old-fashioned  and 
to  speak  the  old  language — like  Stacey  Marks,  the  old 
R.A.,  painter  of  monks  and  parrots,  who  went  down  on 
his  knees  night  and  morning,  to  thank  God  he  was  born 
before  everybody  was  so  clever  ! 

At  present,  a  return  to  simplicity  rather  than  an 
advance  to  complexity  of  statement  seems  to  be  most 
called  for.  Even  a  return  to  a  use  of  abstract  symbols 
is  acceptable,  not  only  among  thinking  artists,  but  by 
the  most  thoughtless  public.  An  examination  of  the 
popularjprints  and  ladies'  journals  of  France,  England 


THE   THIRD   kND   FOURTH   DIMENSIONS  55 

and  America  shows  that  what  in  the  'nineties  would  have 
raised  shrieks  of  horror  at  its  eccentricity,  almost  its 
immorality,  is  now  the  weekly  fare  of  the  fashionable 
woman,  even  of  the  "  flapper."  In  these  journals  we 
find 'the  illustrated  pages  equally  divided  between  photo- 
graphy on  the  one  hand,  and  an  abstract  method  of  ultra- 
conventionalized  drawing  on  the  other,  in  which  appear- 
ances are  entirely  disregarded. 

Perspective  in  the  sense  of  "  projection,"  both  linear 
and  aerial,  is  deliberately  eliminated,  even  from  the 
presentation  of  every-day  scenes  of  fashionable  life. 
Even  the  single  point  of  view  is  done  away  with,  and  a 
flat  elevation  is  given  of  an  abstraction  of  a  fashionable 
crowd,  on  the  same  principle  as  that  on  which  an  architect 
bases  his  drawing  of  the  fagade  of  a  town-hall.  Not  only 
this,  but  the  drawing  appears  to  be  carried  out  with  the 
architect's  instruments  of  compasses  and  ruling  pen  with 
the  aid  of  T  and  set  squares. 

In  order,  therefore,  to  understand  the  multiple  points 
of  view,  it  is  necessary  to  examine  the  single  aspect  with 
which  every  student  of  perspective  is  already  familiar. 

Elementary  as  it  may  appear  to  many  minds,  it  will 
be  as  well  to  state  the  simple  theory  upon  which  most 
pictorial  art  has  been  based  since  the  time  of  Ucello. 


VI 

THE    PICTURE    PLANE 

IN  any  work  of  pictorial  art  purporting  to  be  based 
upon  unity  of  time  and  place,  perspective  must  play  a 
large  part,  and  a  sense  of  perspective  having  become 
general,  any  ignorant  breach  of  its  laws  will  cause  mis- 
understanding and  consequent  offence  to  the  spectator. 

The  theory  upon  which  is  based  all  such  pictorial  art 
as  deals  with  the  optical  appearance  of  objects  is  that 
a  picture  is  a  window  through  which  the  spectator  looks, 
and  beyond  the  plane  or  glass  of  which  all  that  is 
represented  appears. 

The  fixing  of  the  distance  from  the  spectator  of  this 
imaginary  plane  is  purely  arbitrary ;  but  while  this  is  so, 
it  is  not  implied  that  it  is  a  matter  requiring  no  considera- 
tion, little  as  it  generally  gets,  and  unscientifically  as  it 
is  generally  regarded.  In  practice,  it  is  more  often 
"felt  for"  than  "thought  for"  by  the  artist;  but  if 
the  principle  of  the  picture  plane  be  thoroughly  grasped 
a  great  deal  of  fumbling  and  the  cause  of  many  failures 
unexplainable  except  by  a  misconception  or  disregard 
of  the  principle  may  be  avoided. 

If  the  means  used  be  a  point,  whether  etching  needle, 
pencil,  miniature  brush,  or  pen,  which  have  to  be  handled 
by  the  fingers  rather  than  by  the  arm,  and  must  be 
viewed  at  close  quarters  on  account  of  the  fineness  of 
the  work,  the  plane  must  be  imagined  as  relatively  near 
the  eye,  so  that  the  drawing  shall  appear  while  in 

56 


THE   PICTURE   PLANE  57 

progress  as  nearly  as  possible  the  same  size  as  the  object 
drawn. 

If  a  portrait  approximately  life-size  is  to  be  attempted, 
the  canvas  (which  stands  for  the  picture  plane)  should 
be  pjaced  so  near  the  sitter  that  it  will  nearly  approximate 
the  life  in  actual  measurement. 

This  principle  of  the  picture  plane  is  frequently  over- 
looked in  life  schools;  in  some  places  the  students,  both 
those  close  up  to  and  those  at  a  distance  from  the  model, 
being  indiscriminately  expected  to  fill  a  half  imperial  or 
imperial  sheet. 

If  the  fiction  of  the  fixed  point  of  view  for  the  point 
drawings  and  the  so-called  "  life-size  "  portrait  be  main- 
tained, the  etching,  pencil,  and  pen  drawings  and  painting 
should  all  appear  of  the  same  size  as  the  object  depicted 
at  the  distance  at  which  they  were  drawn,  and  therefore 
the  same  size  as  each  other,  since  each  is  supposed  to 
represent  a  section  at  right  angles  to  the  axis  of  a  cone 
or  pencil  of  rays  from  the  eye  to  the  object,  only  differing 
from  each  other  by  the  means  of  expression  and  the 
distance  at  which  the  section  is  taken. 

Moreover,  the  eye  is  perpetually  being  differently 
adjusted  according  to  the  distance  or  nearness  of  an 
object;  so  that  it  follows  that  if  the  fiction  of  a  single 
point  in  time,  i.  e.  moment  of  observation,  is  to  be 
maintained,  objects  in  order  to  be  kept  in  relation  in 
the  picture  must  be  drawn  or  painted  in  such  a  manner 
as  to  suggest  this  relation. 

If  a  near  object  be  shown  in  focus,  an  object  at  a 
distance  will  be  blurred,  and  vice  versa. 

Again,  the  angle  of  conscious  vision  is  very  wide, 
extending  even  to  a  straight  line  at  right  angles  to  its 
direction.  It  is  possibly  greater  with  some  people.  This 


58  LINE 

may  be  tested  by  holding  the  arms  extended  right  and 
left  horizontally  and  as  far  back  as  possible,  and  bringing 
them  slowly  forward,  to  discover  at  what  point  the  eyes 
become  conscious  of  their  presence  simultaneously. 

(This  is  a  matter  of  some  difficulty  to  test  quite 
honestly  !) 

It  will  be  seen  that  there  is  a  large  space  of  partial 
vision,  not  in  this  case  quite  dependent  upon  the  focus, 
but  upon  the  direction  of  the  eyes.  In  this  space  objects 
could  only  be  pictorially  represented  as  a  blur,  if  the 
fiction  of  a  fixed  direction  of  the  eyes  is  to  be  maintained. 

From  this  two  things  may  be  deduced. 

First,  that  it  is  unwise  to  set  up  the  picture  plane  so  as 
to  yield  undue  prominence  to  objects  of  relatively  small 
interest  to  the  main  subject  upon  which  the  attention  is 
naturally  focussed;  but  that  such  objects,  unless  their 
pattern  be  of  value  in  the  scheme,  should  be  dismissed  as 
irrelevant,  which  from  their  nearness  occupy  too  great  a 
space  on  the  field  of  vision.  They  should  therefore  be 
treated  as  non-existent  for  those  pictorial  purposes  which 
are  based  upon  this  convention. 

Second,  that  it  is  equally  unwise  to  extend  the  picture 
to  include  more  than  that  central  cone  of  rays  from  the 
eye  in  which  objects  are  clearly  seen  at  a  glance,  unless 
the  enlargement  of  the  angle  of  vision  adds  beauty  or 
interest  otherwise  unobtainable  to  the  central  field. 

In  any  case  in  fixing  the  picture  plane  these  con- 
siderations should  not  be  overlooked. 

I  remember  about  1890  making  a  drawing  in  which  the 
endeavour  was  to  represent  all  that  came  within  the  field 
of  vision  at  a  given  moment.  This  naturally  included  the 
right  hand,  and  the  drawing  itself  upon  which  I  was 
engaged.  Even  my  knees  came  into  the  picture,  and 


' 
THE   PICTURE   PLANE  59 

it  is  probable  that  the  blurred  rim  of  eyeglasses,  the  cord, 
and  parts  of  a  reduplicated  nose  were  suggested.  This 
broke  both  the  suggestions  I  have  just  put  forward  for 
the  wise  course  to  pursue,  since  not  only  was  it  necessary 
frequently  to  change  the  focus  of  the  eyes,  but  also 
their  direction,  in  order  to  see  clearly  the  different  objects 
introduced  into  the  drawing,  the  picture  plane  being 
fixed  too  near,  and  the  angle  of  vision  being  too  wide. 

The  attempt  had  a  certain  interest  and  amusement, 
but  I  never  repeated  it,  or  saw  the  same  thing  tried  until 
recently  exactly  the  same  thing  was  done  by  a  student  at 
Goldsmiths'  College.  Such  are  extreme  cases  of  appar- 
ently logical  conclusions ;  but  the  more  extreme  the  case, 
the  more  readily  is  the  error  detected.  Any  photographer 
will  understand  the  force  of  the  above  suggestions. 

The  picture  plane,  it  need  hardly  be  said,  is  in  general 
taken  as  being  at  right  angles  to  the  direction  of  vision, 
and  as  being  truly  "  plane,"  though,  of  course,  in  decor- 
ative or  panoramic  work  curved  or  angular  surfaces  may 
have  to  be  dealt  with,  involving  special  considerations 
which  lie  outside  the  scope  of  our  present  enquiry.  What 
these  considerations  involve  may,  however,  be  indicated 
by  suggesting  that  the  reader  should  examine  his  reflection 
in  a  brightly  polished  spoon  or  dish-cover,  or  by  sitting 
close  up,  and  much  to  one  side  of  the  screen  at  a  kinema 
show. 

Ford  Madox  Brown  in  "Behold  your  son,  sir!"  has 
blended  direct  vision  with  a  curved  reflection  in  such  a 
manner  as  to  give  the  dignity  of  the  result,  but  to  subtract 
all  the  dignity  from  fatherhood  itself  in  so  curiously  mixed 
a  way,  as  to  give  at  once  both  the  sublime  and  the  ridicu- 
lous; neither,  perhaps,  quite  true,  and  in  sum  perhaps 
even  less  so.  The  reflection  upon  a  spherical  mirror  shows 


60  LINE 

the  distorted  figure  of  an  absurd  little  man  rushing 
happily  forward,  while  a  nurse  or  midwife  stands  like  a 
Madonna  with  a  child  in  her  arms.  It  is  two  pictures 
in  one  rather  than  one  picture — an  expression  of  two 
detached  visual  impressions  at  detached  moments  of 
time,  in  two  conventions,  yet  in  a  way  forecasting  the 
attitude  of  the  Futurists  in  Art,  which  is  dealt  with 
elsewhere. 

Let  us  imagine  now  that  we  are  seated  in  the  middle 
of  a  long  and  simple  rectangular  room,  facing  an  end 
wall.  Say  that  it  is  entirely  unfurnished  but  for  the 
chair  we  sit  on.  The  first  thing  noticeable  is  the  con- 
vergence of  all  the  parallel  lines  of  the  right  and  left 
hand  walls,  and  the  floor  boards  towards  an  unseen  centre. 
What  is  this  centre? 

If  we  rise  from  our  chair  the  floor  space  appears  larger, 
and  the  ceiling  correspondingly  diminishes,  though  the 
end  wall  does  not  appear  to  change.  The  lines  of  floor 
and  ceiling  nevertheless  converge  in  the  same  manner  to 
a  centre. 

If  now  we  step  right  or  left  still  looking  direct  at  the 
end  wall,  the  centre  to  which  the  lines  converge  will 
move  with  us. 

This  convergence  or  divergence  from  the  vanishing 
point  has  a  curious  effect  upon  the  mind.  From  the 
apparent  widening  of  the  floor  boards  and  ceiling  and 
the  heightening  of  the  walls,  as  they  approach  nearer  to 
our  position,  it  is  natural  to  feel  that  behind  our  heads 
they  would  continue  to  enlarge,  and  that  if  we  could  only 
turn  suddenly  enough,  we  might  catch  the  walls  and 
mantelpiece  at  the  end  in  the  very  act  of  dwindling  in 
size  to  their  eventual  appearance. 

It  is  a  pity  that  Addison,  composing  his  articles  in  the 
long  room  at  Holland  House  as  he  paced  from  the  bottle 


THE   PICTURE   PLANE  6 1 

of  port  on  one  mantelpiece  to  the  bottle  of  port  on  the 
other,  does  not  appear  to  have  paid  attention  to  this 
sympathetically  shifting  quality  of  inanimate  things,  or 
we  might  have  had  a  charming  essay  upon  it. 

Let  us  now  imagine  our  picture  plane  set  up  in  this 
room,  like  a  glass  screen,  to  divide  the  part  we  wish  to 
represent  from  that  in  which  we  stand,  as  the  curtain 
divides  the  stage  from  the  auditorium. 

It  would  be  easy  enough  to  trace  off  upon  this  screen, 
window  or  picture  plane  the  lines  of  the  cornice,  skirting 
and  floor  boards,  and  the  rectangle  of  the  end  wall,  if 
they  did  not  themselves  appear  to  move  with  every 
movement  of  our  own,  up,  down,  or  right  and  left. 

We  have  therefore  to  fix  upon  a  point  of  view,  and  its 
height  above  the  floor,  or  ground  level;  its  distance 
from  the  picture  plane,  and  its  direction,  or  the  centre  of 
vision.  This  last  is  taken  in  all  ordinary  practice  as 
being  at  right  angles  to  the  picture  plane. 

Holbein,  in  his  picture  of  "The  Ambassadors".* 
(National  Gallery),  has  used  two  picture  planes — one  at 
right  angles  for  the  main  subject,  and  another,  at  an 
acute  angle,  for  the  representation  of  the  skull  that 
makes  so  puzzling  an  appearance  in  the  lower  portion. 
Why  he  did  this  it  is  difficult  to  conjecture,  unless  to 
satisfy  some  whim  on  the  part  of  his  sitters,  as  the  trend 
of  his  mind  seems  to  have  been  all  for  clarity  and  sim- 
plicity of  statement,  subtle  though  it  was.  I  doubt  his 
being  more  than  an  accomplice  in  this  matter,  since  he 
is  the  last  person  to  be  suspected  of  being  a  mystificateur 
or  practical  joker.  He  may  have  been  giving  a  practical 
exposition  of  perspective  to  a  couple  of  minds  kind 
enough  to  be  curious  in  such  matters. 

If  the  direction  of  the  eye  be  parallel  with  the  length 
of  the  room  and  the  floor  boards,  the  unseen  point 


62  LINE 

towards  which  they  and  all  lines  parallel  to  them  appear 
to  converge  will  correspond  with  the  point  we  now 
imagine  ourselves  as  marking  upon  the  picture  plane  to 
represent  the  centre  of  vision.  If  lines  be  now  drawn 
radiating  from  this  point  to  the  edge  of  the  picture  plane 
on  the  floor  to  every  joint  between  the  floor  boards,  we 
shall  have  a  perspective  view  of  a  floor  stretching  away 
to  the  horizon,  or  level  of  sight,  where  all  horizontal 
planes  vanish.  The  floor,  of  course,  is  interrupted  by 
the  rectangle  of  the  end  wall,  which  will  cut  off  the  lines 
horizontally,  as  also  the  apparently  converging  lines  of 
the  ceiling  and  side  walls  in  the  same  manner. 

Any  line,  straight  or  curved,  in  any  plane  parallel  with 
the  picture  plane  will  be  represented  at  its  true  angle; 
so  that  all  vertical  lines  will  appear  vertical,  since  they 
are  conceivably  in  a  plane  parallel  to  the  picture. 

This  may  be  well  observed  if  we  place  pictures  in 
rectangular  frames  flat  upon  the  side  and  end  walls. 

All  the  uprights  of  all  the  frames  will  appear  upright  ; 
but  the  horizontals  of  the  frames  on  the  side  walls  will 
converge  to  the  vanishing  point  of  the  walls.  These 
pictures  will  appear  "foreshortened";  sometimes  with 
strange  results  in  proportion  as  regards  the  content  of 
the  pictures;  whereas  the  horizontals  of  the  frames  and 
the  pictures  themselves  upon  the  end  wall  will  appear  as 
they  were  intended  to  do  by  the  artist,  all  the  lines,  no 
matter  in  what  direction,  appearing  correct  in  length 
and  angle. 

The  size  of  appearance  in  pictures  on  the  end  walls 
will  be  conditioned  by  the  distance  of  the  wall  from 
the  spectator,  but  the  proportions  will  remain  unaltered, 
the  whole  picture  appearing  to  enlarge  or  diminish  at 
once  as  we  approach  or  recede. 


THE   PICTURE   PLANE 


Perspective  used  to  convey  the  idea  of  height  as  seen  looking  upwards. 


VII 

FORMAL    PERSPECTIVE 


THERE  are  many  treatises  upon  perspective,  and  it  is 
not  proposed  to  go  deeply  into  the  matter  of  projection 


> 

J 

* 

I 

k 

i 

V 

t 

/ 

^ 

b 

\ 

V 

$ 

t 

£ 

A 

A 

^ 

THE 
TKE    ot VTSrow)     iftE  LINET  FtuaM  EVE  To  C  V 

'        ITROM 
THE  ETVE  BftKI^EL     o  THE  RET- 


THK  CE^OIH  er  THE  EJME  rjiaM.  THE. 
C-V  1?^)KE^EyvrTS  THE  T>LS 
£>t~  THE:  -SPECTATOR. 


TME  FV?risrT-WH£ge 


orEYE-LEVEL 


THE  LtftfE  KL'  KEFBESEJVT^  THE. 

BY -A 
EVE  LEVEL. rsrvmrcH  PLANE,  LrE  TH 

MfST   BE  DRAWN    TO  THE 
THE.  &TE  TO  THE 


PlCTVRE  FLA>Jtl 
DCSXAMCE  BE.IA3W   THE 

^OM-E  A3  TKE, 


FIG  IL 


but  to  dwell  particularly  on  the  subject  of  "  measuring 
points  "  upon  which  so  much  of  the  theory  and  practice  of 

perspective  depends. 

64 


FORMAL  PERSPECTIVE  65 

The  most  important  rule  in  perspective — it  might  be 
called  the  only  rule,  since  from  it  all  others  may  be 
deduced — is  that  the  vanishing  point  of  any  line  coincides 
with  that  point  at  which  a  parallel  ray  from  the  eye  meets 
the*picture  plane. 


PP. 


3-1  VST  VANISH 
AT  V-P1  - 


To  H.C.' 

or  TttK  ftofttf-OfTTAt 
rcH    THE 

t-INETi  Lf^BELOK"  TJHE 

rrr  r  ^ 


For  instance,  all  lines  at  right  angles  to  the  picture 
plane  will  appear  to  converge  towards  and  vanish  in  the 
Centre  of  Vision  (C.V.),  which  is  the  point  at  which  a 
parallel  ray  from  the  eye  pierces  the  picture  plane. 

Similarly,  a  line  at  30°,  45°,  60°,  70°  or  any  other  angle 
will  appear  to  converge  towards  and  vanish  where  a  ray 


66  LINE 

from  the  eye  at  a  corresponding  angle  meets  the  picture 
plane. 

To  find  any  point  C  at  any  given  distance  from  the 
spectator  the  line  of  intersection  H.L.'  of  a  horizontal 
plane  with  the  picture  plane  having  been  drawn  at  the 
given  distance  of  C  above  or  below  the  eye,  a  line  is 
drawn  from  B  at  the  given  distance  right  or  left  of  the 
spectator  to  vanish  in  the  C.V.  This  line  represents  the 
perspective  of  a  line  at  right  angles  to  the  picture  plane ; 
consequently  the  point  required  must  lie  somewhere  upon 
this  line;  and  the  angle  made  by  this  line  B.C.V.,  and 
the  line  H.L.'  is  a  perspective  view  of  a  right  angle. 

The  required  distance  beyond  the  picture  plane  is 
now  set  off  upon  H.L.'  to  right  or  left  of  B,  which  is  the 
apex  of  the  right  angle. 

If  a  line  from  this  point  be  now  found  that  shall  form 
the  perspective  base  of  an  isosceles  triangle,  one  side  AB 
and  one  angle  ABC.V.  of  which  we  already  have,  this 
line  will  cut  off  at  its  point  of  intersection  with  the  retiring 
line  BC.V.  a  distance  equivalent  to  the  side  AB  which  lies 
in  the  ground  line,  and  so  give  the  point  required  at  C. 

The  rule  being  that  the  vanishing  point  of  any  line 
coincides  with  that  point  at  which  a  parallel  ray  from  the 
eye  meets  the  picture  plane,  and  since  the  base  of  a  right- 
angled  isosceles  triangle  makes  an  angle  of  45°  with  the 
other  two  sides,  the  vanishing  point  of  the  base  will  be 
at  45°  from  the  eye. 

This  point  is  found  by  setting  off  a  point  V.P.  upon  the 
horizon  at  a  distance  equal  to  that  between  the  Centre  of 
Vision  and  the  eye,  thus  forming  a  right-angled  isosceles 
triangle  EYE,  C.V.,  V.P.  The  point  V.P.  is  the  point  at 
which  a  horizontal  ray  from  the  eye  at  450°  is  projected  to 
the  picture  plane ;  and  in  which  all  parallel  lines  will  vanish. 

A  line  from  this  point  to  the  point  A  already  marked 


FORMAL   PERSPECTIVE 


67 


upon  the  ground  at  the  required  distance  from  B  the  apex 
of  the  triangle,  will  include  the  base  of  the  isosceles  triangle 
required,  and  will  cut  off  upon  the  retiring  line  at  the  point 
of  intersection  C  a  distance  equal  to  the  side  of  the 


OTJB^VSE  or 

(CUTTING  OfT  B>C 


triangle  lying  upon   H.L'.     The   point   C   is   the  point 
required  to  be  found. 

It  is  a  convenience,  when  once  this  principle  is  under- 
stood, to  call  the  vanishing  point  of  the  base  of  such  an 
imaginary  isosceles  triangle  the  Measuring  Point  of  the 
given  line  and  of  all  lines  parallel  to  it. 


68 


LINE 


Exactly  the  same  principles  are  involved  in  the 
finding  of  any  point  in  any  horizontal  line,  although 
its  vanishing  point  does  not  fall  in  the  Centre  of 
Vision. 


, 

( If  FROTJl/CED  TO 

Mt/S 
Al-P  ( 

HCT?IS 
"RAY"    FK<3/«1  THE 


UtM 
V\ 

>.>>w 
>X*B¥*  ^ 

FIG  VII 


HL. 


The  points  of  intersection  made  by  the  given  line 
with  the  horizon  and  H.L/  being  found,  the  vanishing 
point  of  the  base  of  the  isosceles  triangle,  which  will  be 
the  Measuring  Point,  is  found  by  setting  off  along  the 
horizon  a  distance  from  the  vanishing  point  of  the  given 
line  equal  to  its  own  from  the  eye. 


FORMAL   PERSPECTIVE  69 

Any  two  lines  from  this  Measuring  Point  intersecting 
the  given  line  and  produced  to  meet  H.L/  will  mark 
off  there  the  true  dimensions  of  the  perspective  portion 
of  the  given  line  included  between  the  points  of  inter- 
section; or,  per  contra,  any  two  lines  drawn  from  H.L/ 
to  the  Measuring  Point  and  intersecting  the  given  line 
will  measure  off  upon  it  the  perspective  equivalent  of  the 
real  distance  marked  upon  H.L/ 

A  plane  vanishes  not  in  a  point  but  in  a  line;  as  in 
the  case  of  the  horizontal  plane,  which,  should  it  be  a 
plane  exactly  opposite  the  eye,  appears  only  as  a  line. 

All  planes  parallel  to  each  other  appear  to  vanish  in 
the  same  line. 

Vertical  planes  at  right  angles  to  the  picture  plane,  i.  e. 
parallel  with  the  line  of  vision,  will  vanish  in  a  vertical 
line  drawn  through  the  Centre  of  Vision. 

Vertical  planes  at  oblique  angles  to  the  picture  plane 
will  vanish  in  a  vertical  line  drawn  through  the  horizon 
at  the  vanishing  point  of  their  trace  upon  the  ground. 

A  retiring  plane  whose  trace  upon  the  picture  plane  is 
horizontal,  or  if  upon  the  ground  is  parallel  with  the  pic- 
ture plane  will  vanish  in  a  horizontal  line  drawn  through 
the  point  at  which  a  parallel  ray  from  the  eye  meets  the 
picture  plane. 

A  retiring  plane  whose  trace  upon  the  ground  is  oblique 
to  the  picture  plane  will  vanish  in  a  line  drawn  through 
the  vanishing  point  of  the  trace  at  the  angle  made  by  the 
plane. 

Vanishing  points  and  measuring  points  are  found  upon 
these  vanishing  lines  exactly  as  they  are  found  upon  the 
horizon. 

If  these  few  principles  are  once  thoroughly  grasped  the 
application  of  them  will  be  found  simple. 


VIII 

DRAWING   OF   SOLID   OBJECTS 

Solid  Objects  in  Line. 

As  soon  as  the  question  of  expressing  the  relation  of 
the  spectator  towards  a  given  object  by  means  of  line 
crops  up,  we  have  to  think  in  terms  of  finite  space  and 
concrete  lines. 

The  force  of  line,  therefore,  should  bear  some  relation 
to  the  space  occupied,  and  will  naturally  be  greater  in 
proportion  to  the  space,  and  particularly  to  the  distance 
from  which  the  drawing  is  intended  to  be  viewed,  in  order 
to  make  it  "  carry  "  sufficiently  to  be  readable.  The  best 
distance  to  choose  will  generally  be  that  at  which  the 
objects  drawn  will  appear  to  the  spectator  about  their 
natural  size. 

A  frequent  error  is  to  imagine  that  a  "  fine  "  (i.e.  a 
thin)  line  has  some  virtue  of  delicacy  in  itself;  or,  on  the 
other  hand,  that  a  thick  line  has  virtuous  qualities  of 
"  boldness  "  or  "  strength  "  qua  thick  line ;  or,  on  the  other 
hand,  being  "  coarse  "  it  is  inferior  artistically  to  a  "  fine  " 
one.  Nothing  is  farther  from  the  truth,  since  these 
qualities  are  entirely  relative  to  the  space  in  which  the 
lines  are  drawn. 

The  next  point  to  which  attention  may  be  paid  is 
as  to  whether  the  outline  is  to  be  regarded  as  being  outside 
the  object,  or  whether  the  middle  of  its  thickness  is  to 

70 


DRAWING   OF   SOLID   OBJECTS  71 

represent  the  exact  division  between  the  object  and  sur- 
rounding space,  or  if  the  whole  line  is  to  be  regarded  as 


FROM  "  A  STORY  OF  THE  DAYS  TO  COME,"  BY  H.  G.  WELLS 

In  spite  of    the  difference  of   subject,  the    method    of   treatment  is 
much  the  same  as  in  the  drawing  of  Lady  Flora,  though  the  "  noun  " 
line  is  rendered  deliberately  "  brutal,"  as  well  as  the  character  repre- 
sented by  it.     (Pens — "  Waverley  "  and  Gillott's  303.) 


72  LINE 

belonging  to  the  object  itself.  Minute  as  the  consideration 
may  appear,  it  yet  has  much  importance  in  practice. 

Circumstances  will  decide  the  best  employment  of 
line  in  any  or  all  of  these  ways. 

If  it  is  desired  to  represent  a  white  object,  even  though 
no  dark  background  be  introduced,  it  will  be  well  to  let 
the  outline  belong  rather  to  the  surrounding  space  than 


be  allowed  to  steal  from  the  bulk  of  the  object  itself: 
e.g.  in  drawing  the  moon,  an  electric  lamp,  an  egg  or  a 
white  cast,  the  line  should  be  regarded  as  being  outside 
the  object.  The  reverse  will  hold  good  in  the  drawing  of 
a  dark  object  upon  a  light  ground,  e.g.  a  nigger  or  a  top 
hat.  Compare  Figs.  I  and  5. 

Where  light  and  shade  are  introduced,  even  although  the 
background  be  left  unshaded,  this  will  in  general  hold  good. 

An  error  is  frequently  made,  as  in  Fig.  4,  in  the  represen- 


Note  that  the  force  of  line  employed  is  stronger  upon  the  light  side 

of   the    object,  but    that    it    belongs    to    the   background.     On   the 

shadow  side  it  belongs  to  the  object.     The  darkest  shade  falls  nearest 

to  the  main  source  of  light. 


74  LINE 

tation  of  light  objects  from  a  lack  of  appreciation  of  these 
simple  principles.  It  being  imagined  that  a  light  object 
will  appear  light  if  it  is  represented  with  a  light  outline,  a 
"  fine  "  line  is  set  down  on  the  light  side  of  an  object,  and 
a  "  bold  "  one  on  the  shaded  side.  This  is  doubly  wrong. 
If  a  bold  line  be  set  down  on  the  outside  of  a  white  object, 
it  will  summarize  the  background  as  being  darker  than 
the  object,  and  the  included  space  will  appear  more 


4 

A  common  error.    Note  how  the  dark  side  appears  to  come  forward, 
and  the  light  retires. 

brilliant  to  the  mind  by  force  of  the  contrast ;  on  the  shaded 
side  the  darkest  part  of  the  object  will  be  that  which 
projects  most  towards  the  source  of  light  (Figs.  2  and  3), 
and  not  at  the  limit  of  the  form,  which  will  most  probably 
be  in  receipt  of  more  or  less  reflection.  If  the  outline  on 
the  darkened  side  of  an  object  be  darker  than  the  included 
shade,  this  line  will  appear  to  come  forward  sharply  out 
of  its  place  and  prevent  the  "  turn  "  of  the  object,  by 
emphasizing  its  edge.  Many  drawings  on  this  account  are 


DRAWING   OF   SOLID   OBJECTS 


75 


made  to  look  thin,  papery,  harsh,  tinny,  or  cast-iron, 
according  to  the  degree  of  the  defect. 

Holbein's  line,  where  the  drawing  is  of  a  head  in  a  flat 


The  outline  of  a  dark  object  upon  a  light  ground  belongs  to  the  object. 

light  without  background,  belongs  as  nearly  as  possible  to 
the  object,  which  is  logically  correct,  as  the  retiring  planes 
are  in  receipt  of  less  light  than  those  at  right  angles  to  the 
light.  The  line,  therefore,  belongs  to  the  darker  object. 


LINE 


Where  light  objects  are  represented  upon  a  dark  back- 
ground these  considerations  become  very  important, 
increasingly  so  in  proportion  to  the  smallness  of  the  object, 
If  there  be  strong  lines  employed  in  the  shading  of  the 


background  with  correspondingly  wide  spaces  of  white 
between  the  lines,  it  may  even  happen  that  the  technique 
employed  to  suggest  an  intangible  darkness  overpowers 
the  lines  employed  as  outline  to  the  solid,  and  even  the 
white  space  which  they  include,  as  in  Figs.  I,  II  and  III. 


Forcible   feeble ;    the   emphasis   being   squandered   on   inessentials 
while  the  essentials  are  understated. 


77 


Lack  of  unity;  the  essentials  being  suggestively  treated  and    the 
secondaries  made  out  with  precision. 


78 


Light  air  and  the  character  of  objects  arrived  at  by  suggestion. 


79 


Fuller  range  of  colour  employed  than  in  No.  3,  with  a  more  "  matter 
of  fact  "  result,  and  greater  solidity. 


80 


DRAWING   OF   SOLID   OBJECTS  Si 

Solid  Objects  in  Silhouette. 

Allied  in  some  ways  to  pure  outline  is  the  expression 
of  form  by  means  of  pure  silhouette. 
-    This  may  be  summarized  as  the  simplest  way  of  express- 
ing the  bulk  and  shape  of  an  object  in  terms  of  contrasting 


Pure  Line. 

spaces   of  light   and   dark  without   modelling  or  other 
qualification  of  the  included  surface. 

It  is  obvious  that,  as  in  an  unqualified  outline,  it  will 
be  essential  to  choose  that  length  and  breadth  for  repre- 
sentation which  are  most  characteristic  of  the  object  when 
expressed  in  such  limited  terms.  Unless,  for  instance,  a 


82  LINE 

man  have  extraordinary  ears,  it  is  likely  that  his  profile 
will  yield  the  most  characteristic  result.  The  front  and 
back  of  the  head  being  asymmetrical,  and  both  of  these 
being  shown  in  profile,  will  give  greater  interest  than  the 
oval  of  the  face  viewed  from  the  front.  The  slope  of  the 


White  appears  to  expand. 

forehead,  the  type  and  proportions  of  nose,  mouth  and 
chin,  with  the  angles  of  the  top  and  back  of  the  skull,  are 
all  expressible,  while  none  of  these  can  be  shown  either  in 
silhouette  or  outline  taken  from  a  front  or  back  view, 
characteristic  though  such  may  be  in  particular  cases. 

Light  having  a  tendency  to  expand,  a  white  silhouette 
upon  a  black  ground  will  appear  greater  in  mass  than 


DRAWING   OF   SOLID   OBJECTS  83 

black  upon  white.     This  is  not  necessarily  an  advantage  in 
itself,  but  it  should  be  borne  in  mind. 


We  now  come  to  the  consideration  of  lines  used  not 
singly  as  an  outline,  but  grouped  together,  either  for  the 


A  black  silhouette  appears  smaller  than  a  white  one. 

modelling  or  qualification  of  a  surface,  or  in  order  to  form 
a  tone. 

Certain  lines,  when  used  to  express  form  included 
within  an  outline,  may  partake  much  of  the  quality  of 
this  line,  being  frequently  of  an  importance  equal  to  or 
greater  than  the  contour  itself.  In  portraiture,  for 
example,  the  spacing  and  drawing  of  the  eyes,  nose  and 


84  LINE 

mouth  in  a  front  view  may  be  made  to  yield  more  character 
than  the  boundaries  of  the  face  itself.  These  lines  are 
indeed  outlines  of  form — primaries,  in  short — and  hardly 
fall  into  the  category  of  grouped  or  surface  lines  it  is  now 
our  purpose  to  discuss. 


Pure  line  of  varying  thickness. 

Any  constructive  line  may  be  considered  as  a  "  noun  " 
or  "substantive";  while  lines  used  for  qualifying  a 
surface,  or  for  veiling  it  in  tone,  may  be  looked  on  as 
"  adjectives." 

The  simplest  method  of  grouping  or  massing  lines  is 
by  arranging  them  as  parallels  in  any  direction.  Alterna- 
ting as  they  will  with  white  spaces  between,  the  spaces 


DRAWING   OF   SOLID   OBJECTS  85 

take  on  the  character  of  white  lines,  so  that  the  black  lines 
and  the  white  spaces  will,  if  rightly  proportioned,  combine 


Gradation  by  spacing 
of  lines  of  equal  thick- 
ness. 


Gradation  by  lines  of 
unequal  thickness. 


Parallel  lines,  thick 

at  one  end,  and  thin 

at  the  other. 


Gradation  by  radia- 
tion of  lines  of  equal 
thickness ;  the  darkest 
falls  nearest  the  light. 


Gradation  by  means 
of  radiating  lines  fine 
at  one  end  and  thick 
at  the  other. 


Gradation  by  means 

of      radiation      and 

interlining. 


In  a  large  space  a 
new  series  of  lines 
may  be  an  advantage. 


Gradation    may     be 
suggested  or  implied. 


Lines   too    far    apart 
may  appear  as  a  pat- 
tern rather  than  as  a 
gradation. 

A  SUMMARY  OF  THE  MEANS  OF  GRADATION  IN  LINE. 


to  produce  the  effect  upon  the  eye  of  the  grey  tone. 
This  tone  will  vary  in  depth  in  accordance  with  the 


86 


LINE 


thickness  of  the  series  of  black  lines  in  proportion  to  the 
white  spaces  left  between. 

These  lines  may  be  placed  so  far  apart  relative  to  their 
length  and  the  space  occupied  that  they  hardly  appear  as 


Studies  in  proportion  of  the  number  and  thickness  of  lines  to  a  given  space 


and  their  contrasting  values,  in  single  series  of  parallel  lines  and  cross-hatched. 


In  order  to  define  form  by  contrast  it  is  necessary  to  avoid  confusion 
between  the  scale  of  the  object  and  the  spacing  of  the  lines. 

a  tone,  but  as  individual  lines,  independent  of  each  other 
except  in  so  far  as  their  parallelism  is  marked.  They  then 
take  up  a  position  which  may  challenge  the  supremacy  of 
the  main  constructive  lines  of  the  drawing,  so  that  the 


DRAWING   OF   SOLID   OBJECTS  87 

adjective  is  more  forcible  than  the  noun,  as  in  a  common 
and  senseless  form  of  swearing,  or  they  may  appear,  not 
as  belonging  to  and  suggesting  surface  or  an  intangible 
shade  or  shadow,  but  as  something  positive,  either  as 

4 

construction  or  pattern.  A  study  of  the  thickness  or 
force  of  these  lines  in  relation  to  the  contour  as  well  as  in 
relation  to  the  spaces  between  them  is  important  in  order 
to  realize  how  easily  such  lines  may  be  forced  out  of  their 
due  place,  and  take  on  the  character  of  individual  primary 
lines,  or  of  a  patterning  upon,  rather  than  a  symbol  or 
qualification  of,  a  surface,  or  a  quiet  statement  of  tone. 
It  will  be  seen  that  cross  hatching  may  appear  like  wire- 
netting  or  a  cane-bottomed  chair. 

A  good  technical  point  to  observe  in  the  drawing  of 
such  lines  is,  if  they  are  horizontal  or  nearly  so,  to  draw 
the  uppermost  line  first,  and  to  continue  the  series  down- 
wards in  order. 

The  reason  for  this  is  that  the  instrument  employed 
does  not  conceal  the  line  or  lines  to  which  the  parallel  is 
being  drawn,  so  that  accurate  distance  may  be  more  readily 
maintained  throughout.  Should  the  instrument  used  be 
pen  or  brush,  a  second  reason  is,  if  the  lines  be  carried  out 
in  reverse  order  there  is  a  great  risk  that  the  ink,  which  is 
standing  up  wet  in  the  last  line  drawn  may  catch  the  ink 
at  the  point  of  the  pen  or  brush,  so  that  the  two  lines  are 
run  together  either  in  whole  or  in  part,  and  a  single  thick 
line  results,  entirely  breaking  up  the  suavity  of  the  passage. 

In  the  case  of  vertical  lines,  a  right-handed  draughtsman 
should  start  the  series  with  the  line  farthest  to  his  left 
and  work  regularly  towards  the  right;  a  left-hander 
should  reverse  this  process. 

A  note  may  be  inserted  here  on  "  left-handers."  Old- 
fashioned  schoolmasters  and  schoolmistresses  used  to 
discourage  children  in  the  use  natural  to  them  of  the  left 


88 


LINE 


hand,  demanding  uniformity  of  practice.  A  left-handed 
child  would  be  held  up  to  ridicule,  and  the  hand  tied  to 
prevent  its  use.  In  some  parts  of  England  left-handers 
are  called  "  cack-handed  " — (KCIKOS,  "  evil-handed,"  I 
suppose;  just  as  "  sinister  "  has  acquired  a  meaning  far 
away  from  the  simple  "  gauche  ").  Yet,  paradoxically, 
some  of  the  most  "  dexterous  "  (literally,  i.e.  "  right- 
handed  ")  technicians  have  been  left-handed.  The  late 
F.  H.  Townsend,  of  Punch,  was  left-handed ;  so  is  Joseph 
, . Pennell;  and  doubtless 

77T  /  ' 


many  other  well-known 
artists  could  be  named. 
The  prejudice  in  favour 
of  uniformity  and  against 
left-handedness  as  unor- 
thodox has  died  out  to  a 
great  extent,  but  it  may 
still  linger,  so  that  it  may 
be  as  well  to  state  here 
that  the  mere  fact  of  being 
left-handed  is  no  hind- 
rance to  perfect  technical 
1  accomplishment. 

When  Vierge  was  paralysed  down  his  right  side,  he  had, 
of  course,  to  give  up  drawing  for  a  time.  All  he  could  do 
was  to  move  his  hand  a  little,  then  a  little  more,  day 
by  day.  "  Patience,"  he  would  smile.  He  never  drew 
with  his  right  hand  again ;  but  in  three  years  he  was  draw- 
ing with  the  left,  not  only  in  his  old  style,  but  with  all  the 
old  technical  certainty  of  line. 


When  a  drawing  is  strictly  based  upon  a  statement 
of  form  in  light  and  shade  it  is  a  good  general  rule  to 


DRAWING   OF    SOLID    OBJECTS 


89 


make  any  group  of  lines  used  for  the  modelling  of  a  surface 
follow  the  form,  on  some  simple  scheme. 

The  simplest  plan,  perhaps,  is  to  keep  them  guided  by  the 


fall  of  light  upon  the  object,  when  they  will,  if  the  light  be 

not  far  away,  fall  into  a  rhythmic  scheme  of  themselves. 

For  instance,  if  the  lines  are  arranged  at  right  angles 

to  the  source  of  light,  the  main  direction  of  the  groups, 


LINE 


in  spite  of  a  great  amount  of  modification  of  individual 
lines,  will  be  on  a  series  of  concentric  circles,  like  ripples 
from  a  stone  cast  into  water  (Figs.  I  and  2). 

It  is  only  the  effort  to  state  the  principle  in  words  that 
has  now  for  the  first  time  explained  to  me  a  method 
that  is  frequently  adopted,  most  probably  unconsciously 
by  many  artists,  myself  included. 

This  method,  if  rigidly  pursued,  is  least  satisfactory 

where  the  groups  of  lines 
run  parallel,  or  nearly  so, 
with  the  outline  of  the 
form.  It  is  then  difficult 
to  give  the  sense  of 
"  turn,"  and  a  certain 
flatness  or  stringiness 
may  result. 

It  has  its  grace,  but 
may  tend  towards  weak- 
ness in  statement  of  form. 
It  is  well  in  such  a  case 
to  depart  somewhat  from 
the  simple  scheme  and  to 
3  lessen  or  increase  the 

angle  between  the  groups  of  lines  and  the  light  rays  hi  such 
passages,  so  that  this  parallelism  with  the  outline  may  be 
avoided. 

(In  the  example  given  the  nose  and  arms  offer  occasion 
for  a  change  of  direction  with  advantage.) 

Another  scheme  based  upon  the  fall  of  light,  which 
will  also  bring  about  a  rhythmic  arrangement,  is  that  in 
which,  instead  of  contradicting  or  intercepting  the  direc- 
tion of  the  rays  as  in  the  last  method,  they  are  accepted 
as  a  guide.  The  result  will  be  that,  instead  of  the  lines 


DRAWING   OF   SOLID   OBJECTS  QI 

used  being  arcs  of  concentric  circles,  they  will  form  parts 
of  the  radii  of  a  cone,  the  apex  of  which  is  the  source  of 
light.  Instead  of  the  scheme  of  lines  being  upon  the 


principle  of  ripples  from  a  stone  cast  into  a  pond,  they  will 
partake  of  the  effect  of  a  bursting  bomb  (Figs.  3  and  4). 

In  this  case,  as  in  the  last,  it  is  where  either  the  circle 
or  the  ray  of  light  is  prevented  from  falling  upon  the  object 
that  the  line  is  drawn. 


92  LINE 

Another  method,  and  that  probably  the  most  difficult 
but  most  masculine,  is  based  more  strictly  upon  the  form 
itself,  and  demands  the  greatest  knowledge  of  it.  This 
may  perhaps  best  be  explained  by  asking  the  reader  to 
imagine  a  series  of  sections  taken  through  the  form  at 


right  angles  to  its  length.  If  the  direction  of  these  sections 
be  drawn  as  they  would  appear  in  perspective,  the  form 
is  expressed  with  great  accuracy ;  but  it  will  be  seen  that 
nice  points  of  treatment  will  occur  at  such  passages  as 
the  line  of  the  jaw  and  the  junction  of  the  neck;  at  the 
breasts  and  at  the  pectoralis  muscle  and  the  ankles  and 
such  places  where  a  sudden  change  of  direction  is  involved. 


DRAWING   OF   SOLID   OBJECTS 


93 


Unless  these  complexities  are  artfully  dealt  with,  the 
rhythm  is  interrupted,  and  a  nasty  jar  occurs  to  the 
linear  system.  Such  problems  can  only  be  dealt  with  as 
they  arise  by  the  judgment  of  the  artist.  The  simplest 
solution  is  generally  the  best. 

Each  of  these  methods  is  logically  sound ;  and  each  may 
be  blended  with  or  modified  by  the  other,  provided  the 
sense  of  unity  is  not  destroyed ;  but  a  drawing  should  not 
be  begun  with  one  method 
in  one  part  and  carried  on 
with  another  elsewhere  in 
a  sort  of  mosaic  or  patch- 
work quilt  of  techniques, 
as  is  frequently  done  (Figs. 
6  and  7). 

The  point,  whether  nee- 
dle, pencil,  pen,  or  brush, 
being  a  line  rather  than  a 
tone  instrument,evenwhen 
light  and  shade  or  tone  are 
suggested  by  it,  allafastidi- 
ous  spectator's  pleasure  in  a  drawing  may  be  destroyed  by  a 
wrong  use  of  direction  in  a  space  of  modelling,  no  matter 
how  fine  the  lines  composing  it  may  be,  or  how  pretty 
the  general  effect.  Some  silver  points  may  be  remembered 
very  popular  and  fashionable  in  their  day,  which,  in  spite 
of  the  gossamer  delicacy  of  the  medium  itself  and  an 
almost  sugary  sweetness  of  subject,  were  yet  ugly  in  every 
way.  The  apparent  sensitiveness  of  the  artist,  on  a  close 
view  resolved  itself  into  a  brutality  of  handling  of  line 
that  no  lightness  of  tone  could  conceal  from  a  lover  of 
form  and  rhythm.  Thinking  of  these  recalls  a  discussion 


94 


LINE 


between  John  Morley  and  Gladstone  in  the  House  of 
Commons  as  to  who  was  the  ugliest  man  on  the  benches 
opposite.  John  Morley  picked  his  man,  and  Gladstone, 


while  admitting  the  ugliness,  yet  objected  that  if  enlarged 
to  colossal  size,  a  certain  dignity  and  grandeur  would 
result ;  "  but  look  at "  he  said,  "  and  imagine  him  as  a 


DRAWING   OF   SOLID   OBJECTS  95 

Colossus  in  size.  Nothing  could  conceal  the  smallness 
and  meanness  of  the  man ;  it  would  only  be  made  the  more 
apparent  the  more  he  were  to  be  enlarged." 

If  the  silver  points  mentioned  had  been  intensified 
and  enlarged,  the  same  result  would  have  happened  to 
them — the  charm  dependent  on  the  medium  itself,  and  the 
prettiness  so  largely  a  result  of  the  smallness  of  scale, 
would  have  vanished,  and  the  hard,  conflicting  lines, 
which  broke  step  in  every  direction,  would  have  appeared 
in  all  their  anarchy. 

The  question  is  often  asked  whether  cross-hatching 
should  be  employed  in  drawing  or  not,  as  though  there 
were  virtue  or  the  opposite  in  the  mere  employment  of  it 
regardless  of  all  considerations  of  how  and  when  and  where. 

It  is  frequently  of  great  value  where  two  opposing 
forces  of  line  meet,  as  by  its  means  a  neutral  space  is 
established,  where  the  lines  may  either  die  away,  or  from 
which  the  more  powerful  may  emerge  triumphant.  The 
greatest  neutrality  is  arrived  at  where  lines  of  equal 
strength  cross  each  other  at  right  angles,  or  in  a  per- 
spective of  right  angles  upon  a  given  surface. 

Except  as  the  rhythmic  solution  of  these  forces  of  line 
or  for  the  establishment  of  a  neutral  tone,  it  is  better 
avoided,  it  then  having  no  value,  unless  as  a  correction  of 
an  error  in  tone,  when,  of  course,  it  stands  as  a  confession 
of  underlying  weakness. 

This  is  probably  the  reason  why  cross-hatching,  unless 
as  the  resolution  of  opposing  forces  of  line,  becomes 
increasingly  unpleasant  the  more  elongated  the  included 
white  "  diamond  "  becomes,  as  the  weakness  of  intention 
in  the  original  lines  is  made  more  manifest. 


IX 

SOLID   OBJECTS   IN    SHADE   AND   SHADOW 

IT  is  essential  in  discussing  the  effects  of  light  upon 
solid  objects,  to  form  a  clear  conception  of  what  is  shade 
and  what  is  shadow.  For  instance,  the  side  of  the  moon 
away  from  the  sun  is  not  in  shadow,  it  is  in  shade.  If, 
however,  the  earth  comes  between  the  sun  and  the  moon, 
the  earth  casts  not  a  shade,  but  a  shadow,  upon  the 
moon. 

Reflected  light  is  sometimes  seen  when  the  phenomenon 
mentioned  in  the  ballad  of  Sir  Patrick  Spens,  "  the  young 
moon  with  the  old  moon  in  its  arms,"  appears;  when,  in 
addition  to  the  powerful  light  reflected  direct  from  the 
sun,  indirect  sun  rays  are  projected  to  the  shaded  side 
after  first  striking  the  earth.  In  this  case  the  moon  does 
not  appear  simply  as  a  flat  disc  or  pale  wafer  stuck  upon 
the  sky,  but  we  see  and  realize  its  existence  as  a  sphere 
modelled  in  relief  and  swimming  as  a  solid  in  the  surround- 
ing vague  of  space. 

Outline  being  a  convention  or  symbol  by  which  the 
limit  of  an  object  is  stated  upon  a  comparatively  flat 
surface,  the  included  space  rather  than  the  line  corre- 
sponds with  the  thing  represented;  and  it  might  seem  a 
hopeless  task  to  endeavour  to  convey  the  most  distant 
suggestion  either  of  shade  or  shadow  by  means  of  line 
or  lines. 

Nevertheless,  the  convention  of  such  expression  has 
become  so  common  that  its  conventionality  has  been 

96 


SOLID   OBJECTS   IN   SHADE  AND   SHADOW  97 

almost  entirely  overlooked,  and  it  is  now  accepted  as  some- 
thing entirely  in  the  normal  order  of  Nature  and  Art. 


Drawing  by  forcible  division  into  light  and  shade,  minor  qualifications 
being  almost  disregarded  ("  Waverley"  pen). 

Artists  themselves  have  done  a  great  deal  towards 
concealing  the  convention  of  line,  by  reducing  the  lines 


LINE 


Forcible  contrasts  of  tone  and  local  colour.     A  free  method  admitting 

considerable  margin  for  suggestion  of  surface  characteristics. 

("  Waverley  "  and  Gillott's  303  pens.) 

to  such  a  fineness  that,  to  an  uninquiring  eye,  the  result 
becomes  as  nearly  as  possible  a  tone  rather  than  a  series 
of  lines.  Even  the  line  is  sometimes  broken  up  into  a 


SOLID    OBJECTS   IN    SHADE   AND    SHADOW  99 

series  of  dots,  so  that  the  statement  is  one  of  surface 
rather  than  of  form,  and  has  no  more  construction,  back- 
bone, or  force  than  a  piece  of  shortbread. 

Dismissing  arbitrary  and  ill-considered  schemes,  even 
those  which  fumble  sincerely  towards  the  light,  as  well  as 
those  which  base  themselves  upon  some  fad  or  prejudice, 
we  find  two  prime  factors  to  be  examined  in  the 
endeavour  to  discover  what  law  may  underlie  any  satis- 
factory scheme  for  the  suggestion  of  light  and  shade,  or 
the  modelling  of  the  space  included  by  an  outline. 
These  two  factors  are,  first,  the  source  of  light,  and 
second,  the  form  of  the  object  upon  which  it  falls. 

The  drawing  should  embody  the  expression  of  the 
relation  of  these  two  factors,  in  such  a  manner  as  to  convey 
it  to  the  mind  in  the  terms  of  the  medium  used,  in  full 
and  unconcealed  acceptance  of  the  limitations  this 
medium  imposes  and  in  the  knowledge  that,  if  properly 
employed,  the  limitations  may  even  be  turned  to  \ 
advantage. 

Unpromising  as  line  at  first  sight  appears  for  the  purpose, 
it  can  be  shown  that  it  may  be  made  to  display  form  in 
some  ways  more  clearly  and  forcibly  to  the  mind  than 
any  other  medium,  and  that  the  display,  if  made  accord- 
ing to  logical  rules,  will  lead  to  a  rhythmic  statement, 
containing  certain  elements  almost  necessarily  beautiful. 

To  begin  with  the  representation  of  a  primary  source 
of  light,  let  it  be  said  at  once  that  this  is  impossible  by 
the  ordinary  means  employed  by  the  artist,  since  white 
is  the  highest  light  he  has  at  command  and  black  the 
deepest  dark.  Primary  light  can  be  symbolized,  but 
not  represented.  Even  a  candle  or  rushlight  is  beyond 
representation. 


TOO 


LINE 


The  employment  of  transparencies  or  reflecting  sur- 
faces does  not  come  into  our  consideration  of  artistic 
means  at  the  moment — artistic  and  legitimate,  or  vulgar, 
tricky  and  meretricious  as  they  may  be,  according  to  the 
taste  dictating  their  right  or  mistaken  employment. 
The  gilded  background  of  a  Fra  Angelico  presentation 


The  commonest  symbol  employed  for  a  direct  source  of  light 
is  that  of  radiation. 

of  Heaven  to  express  a  brilliance  and  a  glory  beyond  the 
scope  of  dull  pigment,  and  the  staining  of  glass  to  temper 
the  heat  or  light  of  the  sun,  or  to  add  a  colour  to  qualify 
the  greyness  of  a  cathedral,  are  both  legitimate  and 
beautiful  in  their  place,  and  pleasanter  to  think  of  than 
the  vulgar  uses  of  similar  means  which  need  not  be 
specified  beyond  the  frosting  of  Christmas  cards. 

White   and  black  being  taken  as  our  brightest   and 


SOLID   OBJECTS   IN   SHADE   AND   SHADOW  IOI 

darkest,  a  further  consideration  comes  in  as  to  absolute 
qualities.  In  order  to  see  even  the  whiteness  of  this 
page,  light  is  necessary.  You  cannot  see  the  white  in 
the  dark,  all  becomes  equally  black  with  the  type. 
Strictly  speaking  you  do  not  then  see  the  black,  since  it 


Even  the  dimmest  direct  light  can  only  be  symbolically  expressed. 

is  swallowed  in  the  darkness,  and  becomes  as  indis- 
tinguishable as  a  cupful  of  water  poured  into  the  sea. 
In  order  to  see  the  black,  or  rather  to  distinguish  it  from 
white,  a  certain  amount  of  light  is  necessary;  but  if  the 
light  should  be  too  fierce  the  black  becomes  invisible; 
and  just  as  the  white  became  invisible  in  the  darkness, 
so  the  black  is  swallowed  up  in  light. 

For  our  optical  comprehension  a  tempered  light  is 


IO2  LINE 

necessary,  that  shall  strike  a  mean  by  which  the  black 
and  the  white  are  as  nearly  as  possible  equally  visible  to 
the  eye.  Simple  truism  as  such  a  proposition  may  seem, 
the  overlooking  of  it  has  led  to  many  misguided  efforts 
on  the  part  of  artists  to  overstep  the  limits  of  the  con- 
ventions of  their  metier,  so  that  they  have  been  misled 


Unresolved  oppositions  of  line  leading  to  confusion. 

into  the  construction  of  many  a  futile  little  tower  of 
Babel  or  sand  castle  that  has  perished. 

It  may  be  said  once  for  all  that  the  effort  to  match 
sunlight  at  one  end  of  the  scale,  or  black  in  shadow  at 
the  other  upon  a  flat  surface  is  outside  the  scope  of  Art  ; 
that  any  success  in  this  direction  can  only  be  partial,  and 
can  act  but  as  a  lure  and  a  temptation. 

These,  full  sunlight  and  absolute  darkness,  may  be 
suggested,  but  cannot  be  represented. 


SOLID   OBJECTS   IN   SHADE   AND   SHADOW  103 

Let  us  bring  this  matter  to  a  concrete  test.  Imagine 
an  artist  who  proposes  to  paint  a  realistic  portrait  of 
of  a  man  in  evening  dress,  posed  in  a  strong  light,  which 
falls  full  upon  his  shirt-front,  collar,  diamond  stud  and 
black  coat. 


An  inclusive  scheme  of  contrast  for  a  multiplicity  of  lights. 

It  will  readily  be  granted  that  since  the  diamond  stud 
reflects  the  primary  source  of  light,  only  a  little  lower  in 
intensity,  it  is  beyond  the  scope  of  a  dead  white  and 
unreflecting  pigment  to  express.  To  prove  this,  if  proof 
be  necessary,  the  light  has  only  to  be  compared  with 
the  white  of  the  shirt-front  at  right  angles  to  the  light 
which,  if  the  sitter  be  in  the  "  immaculate  evening 
dress  "  of  the  novelist,  will  be  white  raised  to  the  nth 


104  LINE 

power.  If  the  surface  of  the  shirt-front  be  polished  and 
so  reflect  the  source  of  light,  no  matter  how  much  lower 
in  brilliance  than  the  diamond,  even  this  will  be  beyond 
the  scope  of  representation  by  the  painter's  non-reflecting 
pigment. 


Another  inclusive  scheme  for  a  multiplicity  of  lights  by 
treating  the  group  as  a  unit. 

So  far  so  good,  as  to  the  lights;  an  average  will  have 
to  be  struck,  and  the  consent  of  the  spectator  begged  to 
allow  the  diamond  and  the  reflection  on  the  shirt-front 
to  be  lower  in  tone  than  they  appear  in  nature.  If  their 
relative  brilliance  is  to  be  insisted  upon,  the  shirt  in 


SOLID   OBJECTS   IN   SHADE   AND   SHADOW  105 

general  will  have  to  be  put  down  in  tone,  to  the  discredit 
of  its  immaculate  condition ;  but  let  that  pass,  while  we 
go  on  to  the  consideration  of  the  representation  of  the 
black  coat. 

Surely  this  is  within  the  scope  of  paint  ?  Not  only  not 
more  so  than  the  white  shirt-front,  even  when  propor- 
tioned to  the  light  of  the  diamond,  but  still  less. 

The  black  coat  itself  is  as  black  as  can  be;  but  its 
wearer  is  seated  in  a  strong  light,  throwing  deep  shades 
and  shadows  in  the  folds  of  the  coat.  The  painter  has 
nothing  beyond  black  to  represent  the  darkest  of  these 
shades  and  shadows,  and  must  modify  his  pigment  to 
represent  the  coat  where  light  falls  upon  it,  in  accordance 
with  whatever  key  he  has  set  up  for  himself  to  work  by. 
If  he  has  much  reduced  the  white  of  the  shirt  in  order  to 
emphasize  the  brilliance  of  the  diamond,  his  range  of 
contrast  between  the  deep  shadows  and  the  light  upon  the 
coat  is  already  much  restricted.  But  again,  let  that  pass. 

Let  the  sitter  leave  the  throne;  and  now  imagine  the 
picture  placed  at  right  angles  upon  the  throne  which 
the  sitter  has  just  left,  and  at  right  angles  to  the  same 
source  of  light.  Being  upon  the  flat,  the  black  which 
stood  for  the  deepest  shadows  in  the  coat  will  be  in  receipt 
of  light,  equally  with  the  representation  of  the  shirt-front 
and  the  diamond  stud.  The  whole  flat  surface  will  throw 
back  light,  except  that  it  is  conditioned  by  the  absorbence 
or  non-absorbence  of  the  pigment  composing  its  patches 
of  local  colour  and  tone. 

Now  what  happens?  The  blackest  shadow  in  the 
painted  coat  will  appear  no  lower  in  tone  than  did  the 
coat  where  it  was  in  receipt  of  light  at  the  same  angle  as 
the  picture  now  receives  it. 

The  middle  tones  may  be  true;    but  above  and  below 


106  LIXE 

these  tones  it  will  be  seen  that  representation  is  outside 
the  capacity  of  pigment  on  a  flat  surface. 

If  the  light  be  turned  up  to  enhance  the  light  passages 
of  the  picture,  by  so  much  also  the  deep  shadows  are 
weakened;  and  if  the  light  be  turned  down,  by  so  much 
the  .brilliance  of  the  diamond  and  the  laundry  work  will 
be  diminished  in  the  picture. 

It  is,  of  course,  possible  by  forcing  the  note  to  paint 
a  picture  for  a  given  situation  as  regards  lighting  con- 
ditions that  shall  enable  the  painter,  by  a  careful  study 
of  these,  to  obtain  a  highly  realistic  effect,  such  as  may 
be  seen  in  the  Wiertz  Museum  in  Brussels,  where  the 
spectator  looks  as  through  a  keyhole  into  a  kind  of 
peepshow;  but  away  from  such  exceptional  conditions 
such  work  will  almost  certainly  appear  false. 

All  such  methods  belong  to  the  showman  and  the 
penny  gaff,  and  have  little  to  do  with  the  fine  arts;  and 
unless  he  is  professedly  cynical  or  jesting  in  their  employ- 
ment, the  artist  can  blame  no  one  but  himself  if  his 
taste  is  discredited  as  a  result. 

A  picture  or  drawing  that  is  not  primarily  for  a  specified 
purpose,  when  it  should  be  conditioned  by  its  purpose 
and  situation,  as  a  wall  decoration,  or  a  book  illustration, 
cannot  lay  down  its  own  terms  of  lighting  or  other  cir- 
cumstance, but  must  be  calculated  for  average  conditions ; 
'the  owner  can  hardly  be  expected  to  build  a  special  cup- 
board with  lighting  artfully  arranged  for  every  picture,  nor 
to  squint  through  the  keyhole  to  enjoy  it,  nor  expect  his 
guests  to  line  up  in  a  queue  to  take  their  turns  to  admire. 

Failing  such  conditions  the  artist  should  confine 
himself  within  the  limits  and  conventions  of  his  art; 
and  given  such  conditions,  let  him — well  ?  what  ? — 
turn  away  from  them  and  all  such  clap-trap. 


SOLID   OBJECTS   IN   SHADE   AND   SHADOW  IO/ 

It  may  be  laid  down  as  an  axiom  that  light,  unless 
it  fall  inside  the  limits  of  black  and  white,  cannot  be 
represented,  but  only  suggested.  If  representation  be 
attempted,  the  truth  of  the  representation  will  be  falsified 
as  soon  as  the  conditions  under  which  the  representation 
appears  true  are  altered.  Further,  that  unless  for  such 
fixed  conditions,  it  is  an  error  of  taste  or  judgment,  or 
both,  to  attempt  such  realism  of  effect,  even  should  it 
lie  inside  the  scope  of  the  medium  employed.  Relative 
truth  is  another  matter,  and  the  truth  to  be  expressed 
should  be  selected  according  to  the  method  employed. 
If  this  be  granted  of  such  means  as  oil  paint,  which  is  the 
most  inclusive  of  all  media,  it  will  more  readily  be  granted 
of  line,  which  is  the  most  selective  and  exclusive. 

Line  is  the  expression  of  limit  and  direction,  rather 
than  of  subtleties  of  gradation  of  tone  or  colour. 

Form  is  displayed  first  by  the  space  it  occupies,  and 
second  by  its  interception  of  light. 

The  limit  of  form,  or  outline,  is  therefore  the  first 
essential.  The  direction  of  light  in  relation  to  it  is  the 
second. 

In  expression  of  light  and  shade  the  first  thing  to 
establish  is  the  division  between  the  two. 

This  will  be  most  forcible  where  the  rays  from  the  main 
source  of  light  become  tangential  to  the  object  illuminated. 

The  strongest  light  upon  any  surface  other  than  a 
polished  or  reflecting  one  will  be  where  the  surface  most 
directly  fronts  the  rays.  If  this  surface  be  at  right 
angles  to  the  light,  it  will  intercept  its  rays  with  the 
fullest  effect.  The  nearer  it  approaches  the  right  angle, 
the  lighter  it  will  be,  and  the  nearer  the  surface  approaches 
the  parallel  to  the  rays,  the  darker  it  will  appear. 

An  object  set  up  in  gloomy  space  in  which  there  are  no 


108  LINE 

reflections,  and  illuminated  only  by  a  single  appreciable 
light,  will  be  revealed  to  the  sight  only  by  that  part  which 
is  in  receipt  of  direct  light  rays,  and  will  be  entirely 
obscured  at  and  beyond  those  points  where  the  rays 
become  tangential  to  the  object. 

This  is  the  most  familiar  appearance  of  the  moon,  which 
presents  a  good  example  of  a  dull  object  in  receipt  of 
light  from  another  source.  If  the  moon  had  a  polished 
surface  like  a  billiard  ball  or  a  bald  head,  we  should 
receive  light  from  it  in  quite  a  different  manner. 

If  the  light  be  very  powerful  (since  we  have  already 
observed  that  qualifications  by  local  colour,  even  as  far 
apart  as  black  and  white,  may  be  entirely  swallowed  up 
so  far  as  our  power  of  vision  goes  either  by  light  or  by 
darkness),  gradation  becomes  negligible,  and  we  have 
the  moon  presented  as  a  flat  wafer  when  at  the  full, 
declining  through  its  gibbous  phase  to  half,  and  then 
hollowed  out  until  only  a  thin  rim  of  light  shows,  in 
accordance  with  our  own  relation  to  the  sun  and  moon. 
The  more  nearly  we  are  between  the  pair  the  fuller  the 
moon  appears.  The  nearer  the  moon  is  between  us  and 
the  sun  the  finer  the  illuminated  rim,  and  the  greater  the 
amount  in  shade. 

A  billiard-player  among  the  stars  would  have  his  game 
enormously  simplified  and  made  easier  for  a  cannon  off 
the  earth  or  the  moon  into  the  sun  by  aiming  his  cue  at  the 
dividing  line  of  light  and  shade. 

Unless  the  light,  however,  be  so  powerful  as  to  flatten 
out  these  differences  to  the  eye  to  the  infinitely  minute, 
and  so  not  to  be  discriminated  except  by  the  mathe- 
matician or  by  mechanical  or  chemical  aid,  another 
problem  arises,  concerned  with  the  relative  positions  of 
the  source  of  light  and  the  object  which  it  illuminates. 


SOLID   OBJECTS   IN   SHADE   AND   SHADOW 

This  is  the  distance  between  the  two,  which  may  be 
expressed  as  the  distance  at  which  a  ray  of  light  becomes 
extinguished  or  swallowed  up  by  surrounding  space  so 
far  as  the  eye  can  discern,  the  eye  being,  for  purposes  of 
art,  the  deciding  judge. 

An  object  will  appear  higher  in  relief  the  more  nearly 
it  is  approached  towards  a  light  strong  enough  to  reveal 
the  surfaces  at  or  nearly  approaching  a  right  angle  to  it, 
but  so  declining  in  power  as  not  appreciably  to  affect 
surfaces  approaching  parallelism  with  its  rays. 

In  the  case  of  the  sun  these  rays  may  be  said  for  the 
practical  purposes  of  the  artist  to  be  parallel  in  direction 
and  infinite  in  length.  Of  terrestrial  illuminants  the 
nearest  approach  to  the  sun  is  that  concentrated  by  a 
lens  into  the  searchlights  we  became  so  familiar  with 
during  the  war.  Even  the  headlights  of  a  motor  car 
will,  in  the  surrounding  darkness,  reveal  a  suddenly 
emerging  face  as  though  it  were  cut  in  paper,  and  as 
flat  to  the  eye  as  the  moon,  all  gradation  being  obliterated 
by  the  force  of  light  upon  every  plane  presented  to  its 
rays,  any  reflection  being  negligible.  The  utmost 
appearance  of  relief  will  be  obtained  by  a  single  light  of 
low  power,  like  a  candle,  falling  upon  an  object  in  a  space 
where  there  is  nothing  to  yield  appreciable  reflections, 
so  that  while  all  surfaces  at  right  angles  to  the  light  will 
be  illuminated,  the  power  of  the  light  being  limited,  the 
force  of  the  illumination  will  be  appreciably  less  the 
greater  the  distance  of  the  surface  from  the  source  of 
light ;  and  even  the  slightest  divergence  of  the  form  from 
a  right  angle  to  the  light  becomes  obvious  to  the  eye  by 
its  greater  relative  darkness. 

We  thus  arrive  at  two  principles  by  which  light  may 
be  presented  to  the  mind  in  terms  of  line. 


IIO  LINE 

The  first  of  these  principles  is  the  direction  of  the  rays. 

The  second  principle  is  their  length,  or  effective  force. 

In  both  of  these  principles  "  infinity  "  is  taken  as 
represented  by  those  tones  or  colours  beyond  which 
differences  become  inappreciable  to  vision — the  colour 
"  vanishing  points  "  of  black  and  white,  equivalent  to 
vanishing  points  and  lines  in  linear  perspective. 

The  direction  of  the  rays  is  readily  expressible  by 
means  of  lines  forming  a  cone  or  pencil  of  which  the 
source  of  light  is  the  apex. 

Their  effective  force  in  space  may  be  expressed  by  a 
series  of  concentric  circles  struck  from  the  point  of  light, 
becoming  relatively  closer  together  as  the  circumferences 
increase,  to  the  infinity  or  vanishing  tone  where  blackness 
or  ultimate  dark  sets  in,  and  becoming  wider  apart 
towards  the  infinity  or  vanishing  point  of  whiteness  or 
ultimate  expression  of  light. 

But  if  the  rays  be  intercepted  by  an  opaque  object, 
before  they  are  exhausted  or  dissipated  by  distance  from 
their  source,  darkness  is  the  result  either  in  the  form  of 
shade  or  shadow.  The  shadow  will  be  broad  or  narrow 
in  proportion  as  the  angle  of  the  surface  approaches  a 
right  angle  with  the  source  of  light,  and  so  intercepts 
many  of  the  rays,  or  approaches  the  parallel,  and  so 
intercepts  but  few.  If  the  rays  be  very  powerful  and 
the  object  absorbent  of  light,  as  in  the  case  of  the  sun 
shining  upon  the  moon,  gradation  of  light  and  shade  may 
be  so  reduced  as  to  become  negligible,  the  circular  rather 
than  the  spherical  character  of  the  moon  being  made 
apparent  to  our  eyes. 


X 


MODELLING    OF    SOLID   OBJECTS 

IT  is  important  to  realize  the  great  part  that  a  sym- 
pathetic ending  to  every  line  plays  in  dealing  with 
modifications  of  curved  surfaces.  Although  these  endings 
are  more  conspicuous  on  the  lighted  side  of  an  object, 


i.  Modelling  by  sec- 
tions of  form  2. 


2.  By  gradations  of 
straight  lines. 


3.  By  the  fall  of 
light. 


they  will,  if  too  abrupt  in  the  shade  or  shadow,  though 
felt  rather  than  seen,  destroy  the  luminosity  and  beauty 
of  any  passage  in  which  they  occur. 

It  is  sometimes  feasible  to  break  down  such  an  abrupt- 
ness of  transition  by  the  use  of  dots  in  addition  to  lines, 


112 


LINE 


as  Vandyck,  Legros  and  many  other  etchers  have  done. 
But  in  spite  of  such  good  authority  it  is  a  device  to  be 
sparingly  employed.  The  weaker  the  draughtsman  the 
more  danger  there  is  in  the  practice,  as  the  temptation 
will  be  more  and  more  towards  drawing  by  surface  rather 


Methods  of  modelling  dictated  by  the  character  of  objects. 

than  by  construction,  ending  possibly  by  basing  the 
drawing  entirely  upon  such  means,  like  Bartolozzi,  who, 
little  as  he  was,  was  the  greatest  of  all  stipplers — a  kind 
of  human  air-brush,  who  as  such  still  occupies  a  certain 
order  in  the  abyss. 

Such  use  as  Vandyck  and  the  master  draughtsmen  have 
made  of  these  abbreviated  lines  and  dots  has  always 
been  subsidiary  to  that  of  line. 

In  drawing  with  the  pen,  if  a  flexible  one  be  employed, 


i .  Modelling  by  lines  across  the  direction 
of  the  light  rays ; 


2.  by  horizontal  sections  of 
form; 


3.  by  lines  parallel  with  the  rays  of  light ;  4.  by  vertical  sections  of  form. 

SIMPLE  METHODS  OF  MODELLING  OF  SOLIDS. 
I  113 


LINE 


the  stroke  should  be  begun  in  the  air  before  the  pen  is 
brought  into  contact  with  the  paper.  This  should  be  at 
an  acute  angle.  When  the  thick  part  of  the  line  is 


Pure  line  of  almost  even  thickness,  slightly  modified  by  the  use 

of  dots.     Methodical  and  stylistic — tending  to  be  cold,  hard  and 

unsympathetic.     (Gillott's  303  pen.) 

complete,  the  pen  should  be  raised  gradually,  thus  relaxing 
whatever  pressure  is  employed  as  it  approaches  the  end 
of  the  stroke,  so  that  the  stroke  is  continued  in  the  air, 


MODELLING   OF   SOLID   OBJECTS  115 

the  pen  not  being  allowed  to  rest  at  the  end  of  the  line 
it  leaves. 

If  a  quill,  reed,  or  J  pen  be  used,  it  should  be  so  held 


Drawing  by  patches    of  simplified  tone,  with  suggestion  of  local 
colour.     ("  Waverley  "  pen.) 

that  the  edge  and  not  the  flat  is  addressed  to  the  paper 
to  begin  and  end  the  line,  should  it  be  desired  to  gradate 
both  ends,  the  pen  being  turned  so  that  the  flat  is  pre- 
sented to  the  paper  only  in  the  middle  of  the  stroke. 


n6 


LINE 


Unless  the  pen  is  handled  in  such  a  way  a  blob  will  form 
at  the  end  of  the  line,  and  gradation  be  destroyed.  In 
the  management  of  a  large  patch  of  shadow,  attention 


Inclusive  method  in  which  local  colour  and  texture  are  freely 

introduced,  so  that  considerable  realism  is  possible. 

("  Waverley  "  and  Gillott's  303  pens.) 

to  this  point  is  as  important  as  the  even  laying  of  the 
lines,  otherwise  an  ugly  and  obstreperous  joint  may 
appear  which  will  destroy  all  the  charm  and  sense  of 


LOCAL  COLOUR  AND  SURFACE  117 

mystery.  The  shadow  will  take  on  the  character  of  a 
positive  object,  like  a  black  but  indeterminate  something 
floating  about  in  space,  instead  of  standing  for  a  negation, 
an  intangible  gloom,  or  the  qualification  by  tone  of  some 
object  partially  lost  in  darkness. 

Local  Colour  and  Surface 

Hitherto  attention  has  been  paid  only  to  individual 
forms  as  expressed  by  line  and  light  and  shade. 


It  may  be  as  well  to  consider  at  this  point  the  intro- 
duction of  a  suggestion  of  "  local  colour,"  as  the  colour 
belonging  to  individual  objects  is  called,  apart  from  how 
the  form  itself  is  affected  by  light ;  as  a  red  coat,  a  blue 
skirt,  a  yellow  jacket,  a  green  tree,  an  orange  kerchief, 
a  purple  anemone,  the  brown  earth,  a  grey  sky.  The 
colour  of  light  itself  varies  so  greatly  that  an  orange 
sunset,  for  instance,  by  powerfully  modifying  all  those 
objects  upon  which  it  falls,  brings  them  into  unity  or 
harmonious  relation  one  to  the  other,  no  matter  how 
harsh  their  juxtaposition  might  be  in  a  colourless  light. 
This  is  not  our  immediate  concern,  but  is  stated  in  order 


Il8  LINE 

to  emphasize  what  is  meant  by  "  local  colour  "  strictly 
understood. 

In  line  drawing  the  limitations  of  the  medium  are  such 
that  it  is  generally  the  wisest  course  to  restrict  the  effort 
at  discrimination  of  local  colour  to  a  few  simple  tones, 
selecting  only  the  most  obvious,  rather  than  attempting 
the  whole  range. 

Where  great  subtlety  in  this  direction  is  aimed  at,  the 
brilliance  and  vivacity  of  effect  generally  suffers,  and 
the  loss  will  probably  be  greater  than  the  gain.  Minor 
half-tones  and  the  delicate  complexion  of  objects  should 
be  dismissed  as  not  proper  to  the  genius  of  the  medium, 
which  deals  primarily  in  form  as  expressed  in  line, 
emphasized  by  light  and  shade. 

All  very  light  tones  should  be  ruthlessly  dismissed, 
though  a  statement  of  the  form  of  a  white  object  should 
not  be  shirked  on  the  score  of  the  blackness  of  the  line 
necessary  to  express  it. 

The  use  of  local  colour  is  at  times  essential  to  proper  ex- 
pression no  matter  how  restricted  the  means  used  may  be. 

The  difference  at  a  first  glance  between  an  Englishman 
and  an  African  is  one  of  colour  rather  than  of  form; 
and  a  black  silhouette  would  give  a  closer  idea  of  a  nigger 
to  a  person  who  had  never  seen  one,  than  would  a  simple 
outline  upon  white  paper. 

If,  then,  we  imagine  an  outline  characteristic  of  a 
negro  so  far  as  form  is  concerned,  filled  in  with  black 
instead  of  the  practice  hitherto  followed  of  qualifying 
the  white  included  space  with  black  lines,  and  so  revealing 
the  form  by  drawing  the  essential  shades  and  shadows, 
we  may  reverse  the  process  and  draw  the  essential  lights 
upon  a  dark  ground. 

Just  as  we  disregarded  those  minor  light  tones  when 


LOCAL  COLOUR  AND  SURFACE 

working  in  black  on  white,  leaving  them  as  undisturbed 
white,  so  we  may  disregard  the  minor  differences  of  dark- 


"  Local  colour  "  is  sometimes  almost  as  essential  as  form. 

ness,  leaving  them  undisturbed  black,  with  the  result 
that  darkness  preponderates  in  our  statement. 

I  have  spoken  of  "  imagining  "  a  silhouette,  into  which 


120 


LINE 


modelling  may  be  introduced  and  carried  out  by  means 
of  white  lines,  as  a  wood-engraver  like  Bewick  would  do. 
This  method  may  be  actually  followed  by  the  artist  by 
means  of  an  opaque  white  upon  the  prepared  black 
surface,  and  such  a  method  has  its  advantages;  but  in 
practice  it  is  more  usual  to  build  up  the  requisite  darkness 
by  means  of  black  lines  and  masses  and  to  leave  the 

necessary  whites. 

Unity  of  treatment 
is  thus  preserved;  but 
a  considerable  danger 
lies  in  timidity  of  state- 
ment. Black  should 
bear  roughly  the  same 
proportion  to  the  mass 
as  does  white  in  the 
drawing  of  a  light  ob- 
ject, and  in  order  to 
achieve  this  proportion 
considerable  boldness  of 
handling  is  necessary. 
If  it  is  borne  in  mind 

case    that     the 
be  reyealed  by 

the  lights  rather  than  by  the  shadows,  and  that  these 
lights  should  be  as  carefully  selected  and  restricted  as 
the  black  of  an  ordinary  drawing,  well  and  good,  and  all 
is  plain  sailing. 

The  fall  of  light  upon  dark  objects  is  more  obviously 
modified  for  the  draughtsman  by  the  character  of  the 
surface  than  upon  light  ones,  since,  if  the  surface  be  a 
polished  one,  reflections,  though  not  actually  brighter 
than  upon  a  similar  light  surface,  may  be  made  to  appear 
so  by  force  of  contrast. 


Local  colour  is  sometimes  necessary  for   in    this 
discriminating  purposes.  form 


LOCAL  COLOUR  AND  SURFACE 


121 


In  the  case  of  a  white  glazed  jug  the  artist  in  line 
would  not  generally  attempt  to  express  the  difference 
between  the  white  mass  and  the  brilliant  reflection,  since 
in  order  to  discriminate  the  white  on  white  it  would  be 
necessary  to  sacrifice  the  general  effect  to  the  high  light 
by  drawing  the  jug  grey,  but  in  the  case  of  a  black  object 
this  does  not  hold  good. 

An  admirable  example  of  the  effect  of  light  upon  dark 
objects  is  provided  by  the  comparison  of  an  ordinary  silk 


Light  upon  dull  and  shiny  objects  compared. 

hat  with  a  shiny  surface  with  a  dull  opera  hat,  placed 
side  by  side  in  similar  positions. 

The  French  have  nicknamed  the  one  huit  reflets  ;  and 
I  have  heard  it  said  that  the  chief  claim  to  immortality 

of  the  Prince  de  S ,  the  smartest  man  in  Paris,  lay 

in  the  fact  that  he  was  so  well  groomed  and  slick  that 
his  topper  had  nine. 

The  nickname  is  a  good  one. 

Though  the  outlines  of  the  two  hats  may  closely 
resemble  each  other,  and  while  both  hats  are  black,  their 
characters  would  hardly  be  expressed  without  cognizance 


122 


LINE 


being  taken  of  the  difference  of  effect  of  light  upon  them, 
for  while  one  absorbs,  the  other  reflects  it. 

In  one  case  the  direction  of  the  fall  of  light  is  all- 
important  and  reflection  counts  for  next  to  nothing,  so 
that  in  the  ordinary  process  of  strict  selection  and 
simplification  it  may  be  almost  or  quite  disregarded.  In 
the  other  the  surface  acts  as  a  mirror,  so  that  the  direct 
fall  of  light  from  the  main  source  may,  and  most  often 
does,  become  secondary  to  the  reflections.  This  highest 
light  will  be  not  where  the  ray  is  intercepted  by  the  surface 


Light  on  absorbent  and  reflecting  surfaces  compared. 

of  the  hat,  but  at  that  point  where  a  line  from  the  eye 
to  the  surface  will  make  an  equal  angle  with  the  ray; 
that  is,  at  the  point  at  which  a  billiard-player  would  aim 
if  he  wished  to  cannon  off  the  hat  into  the  source  of  light. 
The  brightest  light  indeed  may  fall  not  on  the  most 
illuminated  side  of  the  hat  at  all,  but  should  there  be  a 
distant  light  insufficient  even  to  make  an  appreciable 
effect  upon  the  shaded  side  of  the  opera  hat,  may  yield 
by  reason  of  the  angle  formed  between  it,  the  silk  hat  and 
the  eye,  so  brilliant  a  reflection  upon  the  shiny  silk  as  to 


LOCAL  COLOUR  AND   SURFACE  123 

appear   almost  to   upset   the  laws  of  the  fall  of  direct 
light. 

For  instance,  should  the  main  light  be  diffused,  as 
from  a  north  window,  and  a  candle  be  placed  so  as  to 
be  reflected  in  the  silk  hat,  yet  at  such  a  distance  as 
hardly  to  affect  the  opera  hat,  the  highest  light  may  be 
that  of  the  candle  reflected  in  the 
silk  hat. 

In  the  case  of  the  opera  hat 
the  light  will  remain  unaffected  by 
the  position  of  the  spectator  rela- 
tive to  it;  but  with  every  move- 
ment of  the  spectator  relative  to  the 
silk  hat,  the  angle  of  incidence  and 
reflection  will  be  changed,  and  every 
light  will  appear  reflected  from 
another  part  of  the  shiny  surface. 

These  examples  are  chosen  as  affording  typical  examples 
of  the  fall  of  light ;  and  the  same  effect  will  appear  upon 
any  dark  shiny  object,  whether  it  be  the  reflection  of  a 
window  upon  a  black  bottle,  or  the  sunlight  upon  the 
back  of  a  wet  nigger. 


XI 

EXPRESSION   OF  SOLIDS   IN   RELATION   TO  ONE  ANOTHER — 
AERIAL   PERSPECTIVE 

EVEN  in  such  cases  as  portraiture,  where  it  is  the 
desire  of  the  artist  to  concentrate  all  attention  upon  a 
single  object  or  person,  so  that  he  usually  introduces 
only  such  background  and  accessories  as  will  enhance  or 
intensify  the  interest  of  the  beholder  upon  the  main 
subject,  the  question  of  relation  of  objects  one  to  another 
will  generally  arise. 

A  drawing  or  picture  is  frequently  admirably  drawn 
and  arranged  and  yet  fails  as  a  whole  from  a  lack  of 
proper  understanding  of  the  principles  by  which  a 
proper  relation  is  maintained  between  the  component 
parts. 

This  lack  of  unity  will  generally  be  owing  to  incon- 
sistency of  lighting,  to  errors  of  linear  perspective  and 
proportion,  a  multiplication  of  focal  points  for  the  eye, 
or  a  disregard  for  the  effects  of  atmosphere. 

Most  of  these  subjects  have  already  been  touched  upon ; 
but  the  importance  of  aerial  perspective  yet  remains  to 
be  dealt  with. 

In  a  grey  and  moist  climate  like  that  of  England  aerial 
perspective  is  generally  more  marked  than  in  clear,  dry 
and  sunny  countries. 

An  eye  accustomed  to  gauging  distance  in  England 
with  great  accuracy  may  yet  be  wildly  astray  in  a  clear 
air,  as  our  riflemen  found  in  South  Africa,  most  of  whom 

124 


EXPRESSION  OF  SOLIDS  IN  RELATION  TO  ONE  ANOTHER      125 

began  by  snicking  their  sights  short  by  hundreds  of 
yards. 

The  old-fashioned  "  London  particular,"  the  "  pea- 
souper,"  has  of  late  years  become  of  increasing  rarity, 
and  many  young  people  cannot  realize  what  they  were 
like,  and  will  hardly  believe  quite  true  tales  of  them. 
They  are  probably  destined  to  become  a  mere  discredited 
legend.  French  artists  like  Adrien  Marie,  Renouard 
and  Morel,  when  they  came  over  to  draw  for  the 
Graphic,  used  to  become  wildly  excited  over  their  first 
experience  of  fog  and  the  dramatic  effects  to  be 
observed.  In  extreme  cases  these  fogs  involved  a  nega- 
tion of  all  form,  swallowing  it  entirely  in  gloom,  and 
became  a  subject  for  the  writer  rather  than  for  the 
painter  or  draughtsman,  who  deals  in  visibilities. 

In  the  'eighties  and  'nineties  the  Londoner,  from  Queen 
Victoria  to  the  office  boy,  was  reduced  by  the  fog  to  the 
state  of  the  metaphysician,  so  vividly  compared  to  a 
"  nigger  in  a  dark  room  searching  for  a  black  hat  that 
isn't  there." 

Between  the  density  of  the  "  London  particular " 
which  obliterated  everything  and  the  clear  dry  air  of 
India  and  the  veldt  in  which,  as  far  as  the  eye  can  see, 
everything  is  sharp  and  distinct,  lies  all  the  range  of 
atmospheric  effect. 

My  friend  A.  S.  Hartrick  made  a  most  illuminating 
observation  to  me  on  his  return  from  the  Mediterranean 
to  London,  saying  that  whereas  in  our  dark  climate 
detail  of  modelling  and  local  colour  were  only  properly 
seen  in  sunlight,  in  the  fierce  sunlight  of  Algiers  detail 
was  almost  flattened  out,  and  the  eye  could  only  properly 
appreciate  it  in  the  shade. 

The  enchantment  that  distance  is  said  to  lend  to  the 


126  LINE 

view  arises  not  only  from  the  diminished  scale  of  its 
appearance,  but  from  the  simplifying  and  harmonizing 
effect  of  the  veil  of  atmosphere  which  part  reveals  and 
part  conceals  it. 

The  harmonizing  cause  is  not  only  that  the  sharpness 
of  local  colour  seen  through  a  haze  is  reduced,  but  that 
the  colour  of  the  atmosphere  itself  qualifies  equally  all 
colours  seen  through  it,  so  reducing  the  contrast  still 
further. 

The  magic  of  these  colour  harmonies  and  gradations  is 
for  the  painter  alone,  being  outside  the  scope  of  line  to 
do  more  than  suggest,  and  that  by  some  form  of  associa- 
tion rather  than  representation.  The  draughtsman's 
concern  is  more  often  with  the  revelation  of  form  than 
with  its  concealment;  but  atmosphere  comes  to  his  aid 
by  helping  him  by  a  natural  process  to  discriminate  the 
relative  projection  of  objects  in  relation  to  his  point  of 
view. 

If  equal  emphasis  be  given  to  the  statement  of  every 
object  in  a  composition,  the  result  must  be  a  certain 
flatness  out  of  which  nothing  projects  and  beyond  which 
nothing  recedes ;  and  we  get  a  pattern,  or  at  the  utmost 
a  "  high  relief  "  drawing,  in  which  objects,  though  solid, 
appear  to  be  very  nearly,  if  not  quite,  in  one  plane. 

If  a  drawing  be  made  in  correct  linear  perspective  with 
equal  power  of  line  and  mass  throughout,  there  will  be 
considerable  difficulty  in  detaching  or  discriminating  one 
form  from  another,  particularly  where  they  are  complex 
and  fall  close  together  upon  the  picture  plane,  although 
one  be  much  more  distant  than  the  other. 

While  an  appreciable  mist  will  diminish  the  power  of 
a  direct  light  seen  through  it,  the  light  will  be  visible  at 
a  greater  distance  than  a  solid  object. 


EXPRESSION  OF  SOLIDS  IN  RELATION  TO  ONE  ANOTHER      127 

To  a  spectator  standing  under  a  lamp  a  person  emerging 
from  fog  will  be  visible  by  the  light  falling  upon  him 
before  the  shadows  appear,  all  these  being  still  veiled  by 
the  luminous  fog. 

Dark  is  more  affected  by  mist  than  light;  this  means 
that  while  light  may  be  reduced  in  force,  darkness  is  even 
more  rapidly  lightened,  and  this  in  proportion  to  the 
density  of  the  mist. 

At  a  certain  point  an  average  is  struck  between  the 
two  forces;  but  darkness  is  sooner  swallowed  up  than  is 
light.  If  this  were  not  the  case  we  should  see  the  whole 
of  the  moon  at  all  times  of  its  visibility,  and  not  only 
the  illuminated  part ;  but  the  shaded  part  does  not  show  as 
darker  than  the  sky,  it  is  swallowed  up  by  the  semi-opacity 
of  the  atmosphere,  no  matter  how  clear  this  may  be. 

The  principle  that  emerges  for  the  artist  is  that  in 
aerial  perspective  the  lights  are  less  affected  than  the 
darks.  If,  therefore,  a  continually  reduced  stress  be  laid 
upon  the  shadows  and  local  colour  in  proportion  to  the 
distance  from  the  spectator,  a  perfectly  natural  means 
will  be  followed  by  him.  As  light  itself  is  farther  beyond 
the  scope  of  the  means  he  employs  in  representation,  the 
point  is  sooner  reached  beyond  which  discrimination  is 
either  possible  or  necessary  to  his  means;  and  the 
diminishing  of  light  by  mist  may  be  most  frequently 
disregarded. 

Few  objects,  in  fact,  in  the  sense  we  are  considering 
are  "  lighter  than  air." 

It  is  such  considerations  as  these  that  have  led  to  the 
old  rule  of  thumb  for  landscape  drawing,  which  lays  down 
that  "  black  comes  forward,  and  light  retires." 

Upon  this  rule  is  based  the  practice  of  many  artists  by 
which  foreground  objects  are  laid  in  with  a  powerful 


128 


LINE 


Drawn  with  very  flexible  pen  yielding  great  range  of  thickness  of 
line  from  exceedingly  fine  to  very  broad  :  such  a  method  is  capable 
of  sparkling  vivacity  of  effect,  as  well  as  the  expression  of  solidity, 
texture,  local  colour  and  relative  distance  of  objects.  The  rule  of  thumb 
is  that  black  comes  forward  and  light  retires.  (Brandaeur  518  pen.) 

line,  diminishing  in  force  for  the  farther  objects  in 
proportion  to  their  distance. 


EXPRESSION  OF  SOLIDS  IN  RELATION  TO  ONE  ANOTHER      I2Q 

Forain's  and  Phil  May's  method  of  establishing  the 
relations  of  objects  is  based  almost  entirely  upon  this  use 
of  line  of  varying  strength  according  to  distance. 

Etchers  of  landscape  subjects  act  largely  upon  this 
principle,  giving  a  short  biting  to  their  distances,  with 
deeper  and  longer  bitings  in  proportion  to  the  nearness 
of  objects  to  the  eye. 

At  close  quarters,  as,  for  instance,  in  an  ordinary  room 
(unless  it  be  a  den  of  smokers  !),  aerial  perspective  may 
be  almost  absent  at  most  times.  Not,  of  course,  that 
there  is  no  air  in  them,  but  that  the  distances  are  so 
small  and  the  veil  of  atmosphere  so  thin  as  to  be  almost 
negligible — yet  the  principle  holds  good  in  practice,  fre- 
quently as  the  only  means  whereby  relative  projections 
can  be  simply  expressed. 

In  long  galleries  with  side  windows  it  is  sufficiently 
obvious,  where  the  motes  are  dancing  in  a  shaft  of  light 
so  powerful  that  a  figure  beyond  may  be  almost  hidden 
by  it.  But  here  another  factor  besides  aerial  perspective 
comes  into  play. 

This  factor  is  the  force  of  the  illuminating  power,  and 
while  much  wrapped  up  with  the  study  of  aerial  perspec- 
tive, it  should  not  be  confused  with  it. 

A  room  in  daylight  may  be  quite  a  light  room  although 
there  is  no  sunlight  in  it,  all  the  light  being  reflected 
either  from  the  sky,  the  ground  and  such  surrounding 
objects  as  walls  or  trees,  and  again  reflected  with  varying 
power  and  angles  by  the  walls  and  objects  in  the  room. 

In  this  process  subtraction  of  force  goes  on  at  every 
reflection,  more  and  more  light  being  absorbed,  till  a 
point  of  apparent  inertia  is  arrived  at,  and  reflection  is 
lost,  at  least  to  sense. 

The  figure  beyond  this  shaft  of  light  is  illuminated 


130  LINE 

only  in  this  secondary  manner,  and  neither  the  light  nor 
the  shadow  upon  a  form  so  illuminated  will  have  either 


Force  of   direct    light    suggested    by  enlargement,  and   the   unity  of 

lighting  effect,  maintained  by  the  scheme  of  radiating  line  adopted. 

The  light  is  enhanced  by  strong  contrast  with  the  bottle. 

the  force  or  the  sharpness  of  definition  of  those  thrown 
by  the  direct  light. 

Direct  artificial  light  acts  much  like  sunlight,  but  the 


EXPRESSION  OF  SOLIDS  IN  RELATION  TO  ONE  ANOTHER      13! 

rays  of  the  sun  coming  from  so  great  a  distance  as  to 
be  practically  parallel,  shadows  thrown  by  it  do  not 
radiate  as  do  those  of  artificial  light.  This  is  always 
within  measurable  distance,  so  forming  the  apex  of  a 
pencil  or  cone  of  rays  tangential  to  the  object;  which 
tangents  will  outline  the  shadow  projected  upon  the 
nearest  obstruction  to  them. 

Besides  this,  the  power  of  sun-rays  falling  unobstructed 
or  unfiltered  upon  an  object  is  undiminished,  regardless 
of  terrestrial  distances,  while  the  effective  range  of  all 
ordinary  artificial  lights  is  very  limited.  The  power  of 
the  old  rushlight  was  only  sufficient  to  "  make  darkness 
visible."  The  rays  of  a  single  candle  may  hardly  pene- 
trate to  the  four  corners  of  a  little  room.  In  the  case 
of  any  but  the  most  brilliant  artificial  light  objects  are 
appreciably  less  illuminated,  even  at  very  close  range,  if 
the  candle  power  be  low,  in  proportion  to  the  distance 
of  their  removal  from  the  source  of  light. 

If,  then,  there  be  but  a  single  source  of  light,  and  this  of 
insufficient  power  to  set  up  reflections  from  surrounding 
objects,  only  such  form  will  be  revealed  as  comes  within 
the  effective  range  of  its  rays. 

The  cone  or  pencil  of  the  rays  tangential  to  the  object 
illuminated  will  form  a  wider  angle  the  nearer  the  object 
is  approached  to  the  light,  and  the  object  will  throw  a 
wider  shadow.  Every  child  who  has  made  shadow 
pictures  of  rabbits,  swans  and  negroes  upon  a  wall  knows 
that  the  rabbits,  swans  and  negroes  become  larger  and 
less  distinct  the  nearer  the  hands  are  brought  to  the 
candle,  but  the  smaller  and  more  distinct  the  nearer  the 
hands  are  brought  to  the  wall. 

Here  two  principles  are  involved.  The  penumbra  of 
the  hand  increases  as  the  hand  approaches  the  candle, 


132  LINE 

and  the  base  of  the  pencil  of  rays  is  increased,  because 
the  rays  spread  not  from  a  single  point  only  but  from  a 
space  of  light.  Should  the  candle  gutter  and  make  a  tall 
flame,  the  penumbra  will  be  still  further  enlarged,  rays 
from  the  top  and  bottom  of  the  flame  getting  upwards 
and  downwards  to  the  wall  tangential  to  the  hand  from 
many  more  points,  so  that  an  increasing  angle  of  penumbra 
is  formed.  Should  the  flame  be  very  tall  and  the  hand 
very  small,  no  part  of  the  wall  may  be  absolutely  deprived 
of  light-.  As  the  hand  is  approached  to  the  wall,  not 
only  does  the  angle  of  the  penumbra  so  diminish  as  to 
become  negligible,  the  edge  of  shadow  being  hardly 
gradated  at  all,  but  the  possibility  of  reflection  is  more 
and  more  shut  off  from  whatever  sources  may  chance, 
and  the  depth  of  the  shadow  is  therefore  much  increased. 


XII 

SHADOWS,    REFLECTIONS   AND   AERIAL   PERSPECTIVE 

A  CURIOUS  effect  may  frequently  be  observed  on  almost 
any  autumn  morning  in  which  a  low  mist  lies  hovering 
over  the  water  of  a  lake  or  river,  yet  I  have  never  seen 
it  remarked  upon,  though  it  has  in  it  all  the  elements 
of  enchantment.  Mr.  De  La  Mare  should  have  remarked 
and  written  of  it,  as  it  is  peculiarly  "  a  subject  made  to  his 
hand,"  as  well  as  to  his  name ;  nor  have  I  seen  it  painted, 
though  it  must  have  been  familiar  to  Corot  in  all  its  charm. 

The  layer  of  mist  shuts  out  all  but  the  nearest  objects 
on  a  level  with  the  spectator's  eye  in  every  direction,  so 
that  little  but  the  ground  he  walks  on  and  the  sky  imme- 
diately above  his  head  are  visible  to  him,  though  he  may 
be  conscious  of  the  shining  of  a  pale  sun,  so  that  he  walks 
upon  an  almost  obliterated  earth  with  his  head  in  a  cloud 
of  mother-o'-pearl. 

Nothing  is  startling  in  such  an  atmosphere,  so  that  to 
see  with  wide-awake  morning  eyes  a  world  turned  upside 
down,  and  almost  to  tread  off  solid  earth  into  the  green 
tree-tops,  seems  at  the  moment  in  so  hushed  and  strange 
a  world  like  a  familiar  experience,  with  all  the  familiarity 
of  a  dream. 

Only  with  the  increase  in  the  power  of  the  sun  the  mist 
disperses  and  things  gradually  resume  their  normal  appear- 
ance. It  seems  then  less  like  sacrilege  to  examine  into 
corners  in  order  rudely  to  explain  mysteries  by  solid 
matters  of  fact  and  cool  reason. 

133 


134  LINE 

It  is  indeed  only  by  understanding  that  the  artist  can 
recreate  the  enchantment  at  will.  The  particular  enchant- 
ment is  all  a  matter  of  reflection.  The  mist  lies  slightly 
above  the  level  of  the  water,  leaving  the  surface  clear. 
While  horizontally  it  is  too  thick  and  opaque  for  the  eye  to 
penetrate  to  the  far  side  of  the  lake,  vertically  it  is  but  a 
thin  sheet,  and  the  reflections  of  the  tree-tops  are  most 
vivid  at  the  spectator's  foot,  while  the  trees  themselves 
are  entirely  cut  off  from  vision  by  the  horizontal  mist. 

A  common  error  is  to  confuse  "  shadows  "  and  "  reflec- 
tions " — a  notorious  example  being  in  the  misnamed 
fable  of  the  dog  and  his  shadow.  A  shadow  is  caused  by 
the  obstruction  of  light  rays  from  falling  upon  any  object 
regardless  of  the  position  of  the  spectator  to  it. 

On  the  other  hand,  a  "  reflection  "  proper,  in  the  sense 
of  an  image  projected  upon  a  polished  surface  of  any  kind 
which  then  acts  as  a  mirror,  varies  with  the  position  of 
the  spectator  in  relation  to  the  object  reflected,  and  the 
angle  which  the  polished  surface  makes  between  the  two. 

Two  or  more  spectators  will  see  the  same  shadow,  but 
no  two  persons  see  exactly  the  same  reflection.  It  is 
true  that  the  reflection  will  appear  much  the  same  to  per- 
sons standing  close  together;  but  should  they  stand  far 
apart  it  will  be  different  parts  of  the  object  which  they 
will  see  reflected,  regardless  of  whether  it  is  the  illuminated 
or  shaded  side.  In  the  case  of  the  shadow  of  an  object  it 
is  only  the  perspective  of  the  shadow  that  will  be  affected 
by  a  change  of  position  on  the  part  of  the  spectator. 

Yet  there  is  a  pretty  phenomenon  which  might  be 
thought  to  make  an  exception  to  this  rule. 

Any  one  who  has  walked  up  Regent  Street  or  along 
Oxford  Street  on  a  sunny  day  may  have  noticed  by  the 


SHADOWS,   REFLECTIONS   AND   AERIAL   PERSPECTIVE      135 

side  of  those  shops  which  advertise  their  names  or  their 
goods  in  gilded  lettering  how  the  lettering  is  reflected  in 
reverse  upon  the  pavement.  This  reflection  does  not 
move  with  the  movement  of  the  spectator,  only  its 
perspective  being  changed  according  to  the  changed 
relation. 

It  will  be  observed  in  such  cases  that  the  sun  is  not 
flashed 'into  the  eye  of  the  spectator  from  the  illuminated 
surface,  and  that  in  order  to  see  the  direct  reflection 
of  the  sun  it  would  be  necessary  to  intercept  the  light 
falling  upon  the  pavement.  The  pavement  is,  in  fact, 
in  the  relation  of  an  unconscious  spectator,  and  the  rule 
set  up  that  a  reflection  varies  with  his  relation  to  the 
object  reflected  holds  good.  The  movement  of  the  earth 
which  is  the  "  time  o'  day "  could  be  as  effectively 
measured  by  the  position  of  the  reversed  lettering  on  the 
pavement,  as  by  Gilbert  White's  sundial. 

The  same  effect  may  be  observed  in  a  room  should 
sunlight  fall  slanting  upon  any  brightly  polished  object — 
a  mirror  projecting  its  image  in  light  upon  the  floor,  while 
a  brass  fender  and  fire-irons  may  project  lights  upwards 
to  the  walls  or  ceiling. 

The  glass  wind-screen  of  a  motor-car  shows  the  phe- 
nomenon beautifully,  as  the  reflecting  surface  itself  is 
moved,  and  the  reflection  moves  accordingly. 

A  horrid  little  boy  (whom  I  remember)  exploited  this 
scrap  of  observation  from  a  safe  distance  by  flashing  the 
bright  sun-rays  with  a  bit  of  looking-glass  into  the  eyes 
and  upon  the  razor  of  a  gentleman  who  stood  shaving  at  a 
window ;  and  from  the  language  in  which  he  was  induced 
to  indulge  by  the  performance,  it  is  probable  that  the 
gentleman  was  cutting  himself. 

The  heliograph  had  doubtless  long  been  in  use  at  that 


136  LINE 

time,  but  it  is  no  more  than  the  practical  application  of  a 
knowledge  of  reflections  of  this  order,  and  may  indeed 
have  been  invented  by  a  mischievous  boy  who  had  studied 
its  effects  in  the  way  just  described. 

The  difference  between  shadows  and  reflections  may 
be  well  seen  where  there  are  trees  standing  by  clear  shallow 
water  so  that  a  shadow  falling  from  the  tree  can  be  seen 
upon  the  bed  of  the  lake  or  stream.  This  will  not  share 
the  colour  of  the  tree,  and  its  shape  will  be  conditioned  or 
contorted  according  to  the  shapes  of  whatever  objects 
lie  at  the  bottom ;  nor,  as  has  been  said,  will  it  move  as 
the  spectator  moves. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  reflection  will  share  the  colour 
of  the  tree,  being  a  reversed  image  of  it,  not  indeed  so 
strong  as  the  direct  image  of  the  tree  itself,  but,  if  the 
water  be  smooth  and  the  light  strong,  almost  as  vivid. 
If  the  water  be  stirred  into  ripples,  the  incidence  of  the 
reflection  is  varied  accordingly.  If  the  angles  of  the 
ripples  are  not  sharp,  but  "  oily,"  the  accuracy  of  the  image 
may  be  only  slightly  interfered  with ;  but  should  the  water 
be  sharply  but  regularly  broken,  the  ripples  may  not 
reflect  the  tree  on  one  of  their  sides  at  all,  and  we  may  have 
bars  of  reflected  sky  cutting  across  the  reflection  of  the 
tree.  If  the  water  be  irregularly  broken,  so  many  reflect- 
ing surfaces  are  presented  that  it  may  be  difficult  to  trace 
any  particular  image  or  colour,  and  a  rapidly  changing 
kaleidoscopic  effect  is  produced. 

Many  beautiful  effects  are  thus  set  before  the  eyes 
of  the  artist.  A  natural  symmetry  is  set  up  by  a  simple 
unbroken  reflection,  while  the  predominance  of  the  reality 
is  preserved.  Where  the  image  is  broken  by  bars  of  sky  a 
resum6  of  the  forms  and  colours  reflected  takes  place,  and 
a  more  complex  harmony  is  usually  the  result.  In  a 


SHADOWS,   REFLECTIONS  AND   AERIAL   PERSPECTIVE      137 

swirl  of  waters  it  is  frequently  by  the  reflections  that  the 
form  of  the  water  is  displayed,  while  the  object  itself  is 
distorted  out  of  recognition. 

It  was  a  study  of  these  matters  that  rendered  the  work 
of  the  late  Fritz  Thaulow  so  interesting.  The  effects  are 
so  beautiful  in  themselves  that  a  merely  accurate  scientific 
presentation  of  them  would  almost  of  itself  become  beauti- 
ful also;  but  indeed  it  would  be  difficult  to  carry  out 
such  a  subject  without  some  infusion  of  emotion  to  save 
it  from  spiritual  flatness. 

Another  and  perhaps  more  beautiful  example  of  shadows 
and  reflections  at  one  and  the  same  time  may  be  seen  when 
the  gulls  come  inland  for  the  winter,  and  are  standing 
about  upon  or  hovering  over  the  frozen  lakes.  Gulls  are 
in  themselves  so  beautiful  in  flight,  particularly  with  the 
sun  upon  them,  that  it  is  a  joy  to  watch  them  at  all  times  ; 
but  to  watch  one  wheel  and  settle  down  upon  the  ice  is  a 
peculiarly  beautiful  vision,  for  as  it  approaches  the  ice 
a  faint  reversed  ghost  of  itself  appears  to  rise,  taking  shape 
and  body  to  meet  it,  from  the  dimly  reflecting  surface 
of  the  lake,  to  sink  and  fade  away  into  pale  ice  again 
as  the  gull  rises  into  flight.  As  the  gull  stands  upon 
the  surface,  the  shadow  and  the  reflection  are  readily 
distinguishable,  as  they  both  start  from  the  feet.  The 
reflections  will  partake  of  the  colour  of  the  bird,  falling 
invariably  towards  the  spectator,  while  the  shadow  will 
fall  away  from  the  sun.  As  the  gull  rises,  the  trinity  of 
bird,  shadow  and  reflection  is  broken  up;  shadow  and 
reflection  part  company,  and  gradually  dissolve  as  the  bird 
rises  higher  in  air,  and  the  force  of  the  shadow  is  reduced 
either  from  the  effect  of  secondary  lights  and  the  thick- 
ness of  the  air,  and  the  reflection  is  diminished  in  scale, 
or  dissipated  from  similar  causes,  till  it  vanishes  altogether. 


138  LINE 

The  reflection  will  always  be  in  a  vertical  line  between  the 
gull  and  the  spectator,  but  the  shadow  will  depend  upon 
the  direction  of  the  sun. 

Reflecting  surfaces,  no  matter  how  highly  polished, 
can  never  give  back  more  light  than  they  receive. 

There  is  a  fallacy  common  among  journalists  and  popu- 
lar writers,  by  which  diamonds  "  blaze  "  even  in  the 
dimmest  light.  At  the  coronation  of  King  George  in 
Westminster  Abbey,  I  pointed  this  out  to  Mr.  (now  Sir 
Philip)  Gibbs,  and  chaffed  him  as  to  what  I  expected  him 
to  write  about  the  dazzling  array  of  peeresses,  whereas 
it  was  impossible  to  see  a  single  spark  in  the  dim  light. 
"  You  have  to  exaggerate  for  the  public,"  was  his  comment. 
In  descriptions  of  the  festivities  of  the  week  by  other 
hands  I  watched  the  increasing  brilliance  of  the  same 
diamonds,  until  in  a  report  of  the  gala  night  at  the  Opera 
they  were  "  dazzling,  blinding  in  their  radiance,"  and  this 
was,  I  think,  the  most  bright-eyed  description  of  all. 
This  is  doubtless  good  journalism,  but  is  bad  in  a  picture. 
What  effect  a  diamond  has  must  be  conditioned  by  the 
light  it  receives.  It  may  gain  in  effect  from  contrast 
with  dark  surroundings;  since  a  glint  of  light  from  the 
prime  source  may  be  reflected  with  but  little  diminished 
strength  from  a  gloomy  corner,  among  dull  objects  where 
the  rays  are  all  otherwise  absorbed.  In  consequence  of 
such  gain  it  may  trick  the  eye  into  a  belief  that  it  is  even 
brighter  than  the  source  of  light  upon  which  it  draws; 
but  it  has  no  light  of  its  own,  only  a  reflecting  and  con- 
centrating or  focusing  power. 


XIII 

FIGURE   DRAWING 

ADMIRABLE  books  are  published  on  artistic  anatomy, 
and  no  knowledge  of  form  and  construction  can  come 
amiss  to  the  artist.  At  the  same  time,  in  the  writer's 
experience,  a  knowledge  of  the  bony  framework  in  its 
simpler  aspects  acquired  by  repeated  drawing  rather  than 
by  "  mu'gging  up  "  a  long  list  of  Latin  and  Greek  names 
of  muscles,  tendons,  and  their  origins  and  insertions  will 
stand  him  in  most  stead  in  the  practical  matter  of  drawing. 
Let  him  be  able  to  draw  the  skeleton  moderately  well  by 
heart,  and  he  will  find  it  of  more  service  in  the  setting  up 
of  a  figure  from  life  than  the  most  abstruse  knowledge  of 
the  muscular  system. 

The  proportions  of  the  figure,  its  poise  and  action,  are 
all  readily  established  if  the  elementary  lines  of  the  bones 
are  well  observed  to  begin  with. 

In  examining  a  large  number  of  drawings  from  life, 
it  is  curious  to  find  how  generally  the  action  is  under- 
stated. This  frequently  arises  from  the  method  of  begin- 
ning the  drawing  at  the  head  and  continuing  hanging 
each  bit  from  the  last,  the  neck  from  the  head,  and  the 
chest  from  the  neck,  and  so  on  to  the  feet,  as  though 
the  head  were  a  clothes-peg  from  which  the  body  hung  like 
a  wet  rag,  instead  of  being  stood  firmly  upon  the  ground, 
with  rigid  bones  inside,  properly  poised  from  the  feet 
upwards  to  support  the  head  at  the  top. 

No  matter  how  beautifully  the  detail  of  the  separate 
parts  may  be  drawn,  the  expression  of  the  figure  itself  is 
lost,  and,  if  this  has  any  value  in  the  particular  case, 

139 


140  LINE 

there  is  no  hope  for  the  drawing  from  beginning  to  end. 
At  the  best  the  drawing  is  a  tame  and  spiritless  affair, 
with  no  "  catch-hold  "  about  it. 

Unless  this  poise  and  action  are  seized  upon  to  begin 
with  all  the  labour  is  in  vain,  and  the  more  effort  is  spent 
in  making  it  presentable  by  tickling  the  surface  modelling 
in  pursuit  of  "  finish,"  the  more  grievous  is  the  spectacle 
to  the  judicious,  since  the  end  cannot  take  precedence  of 
the  beginning. 

Such  a  result  will  be  less  likely  if,  instead  of  the  practice 
largely  inculcated  in  Schools  of  Art  known  as  "  blocking 
out,"  the  relative  positions  of  the  feet  and  the  angle  they 
make  upon  the  ground  are  marked  upon  the  paper.  It 
should  then  be  noticed  upon  which  leg  the  weight  mainly 
falls,  if  upon  one  more  than  another,  as  this  will  affect 
the  position  of  the  pelvis.  The  points  of  the  knees  and 
of  the  pelvic  girdle  should  be  marked  with  a  dot.  If  it 
be  a  front  view,  the  direction  of  the  breast-bone  to  the 
root  of  the  neck,  and  the  relation  to  this  of  the  collar- 
bones, might  then  be  indicated  lightly  upon  the  paper : 
if  a  back  view,  the  line  of  the  backbone  from  the  base  of 
the  skull  to  the  pelvis  is  of  the  utmost  importance,  and 
in  many  poses  is  the  most  essential  line,  dictating  to  or 
dominating  all  the  rest. 

The  head  should  then  be  securely  fixed  upon  the  neck 
at  its  correct  angle,  and  the  perspective  lines  of  the  jaw, 
nose  and  eyebrows  carefully  determined  in  this  relation. 

The  arms  of  a  standing  figure  being  free  members  are 
particularly  subject  to  variation  of  position  without  to 
any  extent  altering  the  rest  of  the  pose ;  yet  they  may  take 
a  large  part  in  the  establishment  of  the  silhouette. 

But  if  the  system  of  "  blocking  out  "  be  followed,  the 
comparatively  immobile  parts  are  made  subservient,  and 


FIGURE    DRAWING  14! 

to  depend  upon  what  is  properly  dependent,  which  is  a 
reversal  of  the  logical  process  of  drawing  by  construction. 

If  the  points  of  the  shoulder  are  rightly  determined, 
it  should  be  a  simple  matter  to  establish  the  action  of  the 
arms  by  sketching  the  angles  of  humerus,  forearms  and 
hand  by  a  single  line,  instead  of  tamely  blocking  them  in 
as  solids  with  two,  both  of  which  may  be  wrong. 

The  action  is  the  first  thing  to  be  observed  and  stated ; 
and  the  expressive  line  of  this  will  be  found  to  be  that  of 
the  skeleton,  so  that  this  is  by  far  the  safest  as  well  as 
the  simplest  guide  to  follow,  not  that  of  the  muscular 
contours. 

"  Blocking  out  "  is  a  dangerous  habit  to  get  into,  as 
it  means  the  setting  down  at  the  very  beginning  of  at 
least  two  lines  that  are  not  even  intended  to  remain, 
but  must  be  eventually  rubbed  out.  It  presupposes 
absolute  stillness  in  the  thing  drawn,  and  unlimited  time 
for  the  execution  of  the  drawing.  It  treats  all  objects 
alike,  and  takes  no  cognizance  of  their  essential  differences. 
It  leads  to  a  lazy,  because  indirect,  habit  of  mind,  and  a 
bad  notion  of  style,  as  it  is  inclined  to  destroy  the  sense 
of  suppleness  of  line,  or,  at  best,  to  retard  its  acquirement. 

The  fewer  lines  that  are  put  down  as  scaffolding — that 
is,  with  the  intention  of  taking  them  out — the  better; 
and  the  less  the  habit  of  using  indiarubber  is  encouraged 
the  better.  Directness  and  freshness  are  qualities  of 
high  value  in  themselves,  in  line  as  in  every  other  medium. 
In  any  attempt  at  stylish  drawing,  therefore,  it  is  better, 
even  though  the  line  be  tentative,  to  aim  as  nearly  as 
possible  at  finality,  and  to  let  the  first  brave  but  mis- 
directed attempt  alone,  setting  a  second  and  conquering 
line  still  more  boldly  by  the  side  of  it  or  partly  over  it. 

It  is  not  that  any  elaborate  anatomization  or  even 


142 


LINE 


much  thought  of  such  should  be  gone  into  in  the  presence 
of  the  model.  Little  or  nothing  more  than  a  child's 
drawing  of  a  man  in  straight  lines,  yet  with  more  know- 
ledge and  intention,  is  proposed,  in  order  to  get  the 
expression  of  the  figure,  which  is  as  important  as  that 
of  a  face,  and  as  definite  as  laughing,  weeping,  or  smiling. 


Points  and  angles  to  be  particularly  observed  in  setting 
up  a  figure  from  life. 

It  is  readily  seen  how  much  of  the  energy  and  expression 
of  a  figure  is  conveyed  by  these  few  lines  and  with  what 
ease  they  may  be  stated.  Yet  how  often  do  we  see  a 
drawing  purporting  to  represent  equivalent  action  arrived 
at  with  the  utmost  care  and  time  in  blocking  out,  but  as 
listless  as  a  wet  blanket  on  a  clothes  line.  It  is  sad  to 
see  a  conscientious  model  in  a  difficult  pose  "  withering 
and  agonizing  "  for  such  a  result. 

Insufficiency  of  knowledge  is  frequently  a  temptation 


FIGURE    DRAWING  143 

towards  display,  as  may  be  observed  in  many  ways; 
and  students  who  know  a  little  of  the  subject  are  often 
disposed  to  underline  the  muscular  anatomy  in  a  life 
study,  much  as  a  scholarly  citizen  of  Stratford-atte-Bowe 
will  introduce  a  French  cliche  or  Latin  tag — "  pro  bono 
publico  "  and  "  pour  encourager  les  autres,"  shall  we 
say  ?  but  really  for  his  own  glorification.  The  study  of 
anatomy  has  in  view  the  more  accurate  expression  of  the 
life,  and  not  the  skinning  of  the  figure  to  show  that  we 
know  what  muscles  lie  underneath. 

Over-emphasis  on  detail  detracts  from  the  large  sim- 
plicity of  tne  whole,  and  should  be  carefully  guarded 
against.  Moreover,  beyond  a  certain  point,  every  added 
accent  discounts  or  even  cancels  out  a  previously  existing 
one,  so  that  the  effect  is  one  less  of  strength  than  of 
weakness  in  the  drawing. 

A  drawing  rightly  begun  starts  with  the  points  and 
lines  of  the  most  vital  significance;  so  that  no  matter 
how  little  time  may  be  given  to  it,  or  what  interruption 
may  prevent  its  carrying  to  the  intended  conclusion, 
nothing  can  rob  it  of  this  vitality,  arising  from  the  artist's 
energy  of  mind  as  well  as  from  the  character  of  the  object. 
Something  of  value  is  put  there  from  the  very  start; 
whereas  if  the  attack  is  indirect,  and  the  work  be  inter- 
rupted from  any  cause  whatever,  there  may  be  nothing 
left  behind  but  the  pathetic  evidence  of  a  vague  frustrated 
intention  to  draw  something.  Failure,  in  short. 

For  one  over-statement  of  the  main  action  of  a  figure 
in  a  life  class,  it  is  safe  to  say  that  there  will  be  at  least 
twenty  under-statements ;  while  the  reverse  may  be  the 
case  in  the  expression  of  detail,  which  is  generally  too 
large,  if  it  is  at  all  intricate,  and  disproportionately 
emphasized  hi  regard  to  its  modelling. 


144  LINE 

One  master  may  be  remembered  by  the  author's  con- 
temporaries mainly  by  his  one  word  of  advice  directed 
against  this  last  most  common  tendency.  "  Sweeter — 
sweeter,"  was  all  his  criticism  as  he  went  from  easel  to 
easel.  He  was  one  who  found  life  so  bitter  that  he  was 
found  trying  to  dash  out  his  brains  against  the  studio 
wall. 

It  is  more  cheerful  to  see  a  drawing  that  tends  towards 
caricature,  which  bespeaks  energy  of  mind,  than  towards 
an  under-statement  that  bespeaks  listlessness  on  the 
part  of  the  artist.  If  mistakes  are  to  be  made,  a  bold 
mistake  is  better  than  a  timid  one. 

The  construction  is  much  more  important  than  the 
modelling  or  fine  discrimination  of  surface  qualities. 
These  belong  to  the  skin,  and  it  is  impossible  to  build  any 
but  a  second-rate  man  from  the  skin  inwards. 

If  it  were  not  for  the  underlying  bony  formation,  the 
human  figure  would  be  no  more  interesting  to  draw 
than  a  cottage  loaf  or  a  jelly-fish.  Softness  has  its 
charm  in  the  right  place — so  has  hardness.  Soft 
cushions,  yes — soft  hearts,  and  so  on — but  not  soft 
heads  and  soft  bones.  Feminine  grace  is  based  upon  as 
firm  a  skeleton  as  is  masculine  strength.  The  "  willowi- 
ness  "  of  a  figure  is  not  to  be  expressed  by  any  compromise 
of  this  underlying  rigidity.  The  surface  forms  change, 
but  the  bones  are  constant. 

It  is  a  good  exercise  now  and  again  to  see  in  how  few 
lines  the  figure  may  be  expressed,  even  endeavouring 
to  draw  the  entire  contour  with  one  continuous  line,  as 
Rodin  did.  This  is  not  proposed  as  an  exercise  to  be 
indulged  at  the  expense  of  close  and  careful  study  of 
severe  and  close  draughtsmanship;  but  occasionally 


FIGURE   DRAWING  145 

only,  with  a  view  to  check  a  tendency  to  narrowness  of 
vision  and  timidity  in  attack.  It  will  help  the  student 
to  realize  what  lines  are  most  expressive,  and  the  value 
of  simplicity  of  statement,  as  well  as  how  much  of  the 
interest  of  a  drawing  depends  upon  the  silhouette  of 
the  form. 

In  every  case  of  a  study  from  life  attention  should  be 
paid  to  its  placing  upon  the  paper,  so  that  the  silhouette 
is  well  arranged  within  the  space  to  be  disposed  of. 

To  see  a  figure  in  profile  with  the  tip  of  the  nose  close 
up  to  the  edge  of  the  paper  as  though  smelling  it,  while  a 
wide  expanse  of  empty  space  is  left  upon  the  other  side, 
is  one  of  the  minor  distresses  of  the  critic  with  any 
decorative  sense;  a  worse  being  to  find  that  a  student 
has  started  with  the  head  so  low  down  that  he  either 
finds  himself  telescoping  the  lower  limbs  as  he  approaches 
the  bottom  of  the  paper,  cramping  in  the  feet  like  a  bad 
boot-maker,  or  reduced  to  cutting  them  off  altogether,  in 
the  manner  of  Procrustes,  that  rough  host,  putting  his 
unwilling  guests  to* bed. 

Beginning  of  the  Study  of  Grouping. 

The  student  should  remember  that  no  matter  how  well 
he  can  make  an  individual  study  from  the  life,  this  is 
not  the  end  of  his  education  as  an  artist ;  nor  should  the 
master  allow  him  to  think  so.  It  is  but  a  means  to  an 
end. 

The  model  is  as  a  rule  posed  in  a  strong  light  against 
a  clear  and  simple  background,  so  that  selection  has 
already  to  a  large  extent  been  made  for  him. 

If  from  looking  at  the  model  he  will  turn  to  look  at 
the  semicircle  of  students,  he  will  see  that  to  draw  them 


146  LINE 

in  line  is  a  task  much  more  complex  than  would  be  the 
painting  of  such  a  subject. 

This  arises  from  the  fact  that  they  are  not  generally 
so  brightly  illuminated,  but  that  there  are  many  cross 
lights  upon  them;  and  that,  since  this  effect  is  outside 
the  natural  scope  of  line  expression,  it  is  undesirable  even 
to  attempt  a  full-tone  statement.  Yet  some  suggestion 
of  tone  will  be  necessary  if  a  sense  of  reality  is  to  be  con- 
veyed, in  order  to  express  the  sense  of  nearness  or  farness 
of  the  individuals  composing  the  group,  unless  an  entirely 
conventional  means  of  expression  be  adopted,  when  the 
sense  of  familiar  reality  is  likely  to  be  lost. 

To  this  end  he  will  find  how  strictly  selective  he  will 
have  to  be — that  is,  in  other  words,  how  exclusive.  He 
will  find  it  difficult  to  resist  the  temptation  to  express 
the  charm  of  delicate  reflections  cast  upward  from  the 
drawing-paper,  and  the  many  varieties  of  complexion  and 
local  colour  which  to  a  painter  might  prove  the  main 
interest  of  such  a  subject.  He  must  not  forget  that  it 
is  form  upon  which  he  must  base  his  expression,  and 
that  such  complexities  call  for  other  than  line  treatment. 

It  is,  he  will  find,  frequently  easier  to  make  his  studies 
for  such  a  subject  in  some  medium  that  will  call  for  less 
selection  than  is  necessary  in  strict  line ;  for  instance,  in 
charcoal  or  line  and  wash,  from  which  he  will  find  it 
comparatively  easy  to  translate  the  subject  into  line,  as 
his  mind  will  not  be  distracted  in  the  task  by  the  many 
accidents  of  colour,  lighting  and  movement,  and  the 
normal  difficulties  that  drawing  in  any  medium  entails. 

If  the  preliminary  sketches  and  studies  be  made  in  pure 
line  he  will  be  too  readily  induced  to  copy  them,  defects 
and  all,  instead  of  re-creating  the  subject  with  a  fresh 
mind. 


SKETCHES,    STUDIES   AND   "  FINISH  "  147 

Sketches,  Studies  and  "Finish" 

It  may  be  worth  while  to  discriminate  between  certain 
aspects  of  drawing,  sketching,  or  the  making  of  studies. 

What,  for  instance,  is  meant  when  we  speak  of  a 
"sketch,"  a  "  study,"  and  a  "  finished  "  drawing  ?  What 
is  a  "  design  "  ? 

There  is  much  confusion  as  to  the  meaning  of  these 
different  terms,  particularly  between  the  words  "  sketch  " 
and  "  study." 

Apart  from  dictionary  definitions  and  etymologies,  a 
sketch  may  be  taken  to  be  a  work  undertaken  and  carried 
out  from  beginning  to  end  under  the  prime  impulse  of 
the  artist,  and  left,  like  the  log  in  the  proverb,  to  lie  as 
it  falls. 

A  "  finished  sketch,"  meaning  a  sketch  that  has  been 
critically  dealt  with  after  the  impulse  is  exhausted,  is, 
in  this  light,  a  contradiction  in  terms.  Properly  a 
"  sketch  "  as  understood  by  the  artist  is  "  finished  "  as 
soon  as  the  original  impulse  has  expressed  itself.  While 
under  this  creative  impulse  the  critical  faculties  are 
practically  dormant,  or  are  called  in  only  as  candle-holders ; 
whereas  later,  to  produce  the  "  finished  sketch,"  the 
candle-holder  dictates  to  the  worn-out  impulse. 

Walter  Sickert  in  the  early  'nineties,  when  an  academic 
ideal  of  "  finish  "  was  more  prevalent  than  now,  turn- 
ing over  a  bundle  of  D.  S.  Maccoll's  delightful  water- 
colours,  raised  the  point  as  to  whether  their  charm  lay  in 
exact  knowledge  of  when  to  leave  off,  or  (chaffingly  of 
course  !)  in  an  incapacity  to  go  on. 

Such  a  medium  as  gouache  in  itself  forbids  any  dis- 
turbance of  its  freshness,  and  it  must  be  handled  as 
a  unit. 


Drawn  with  very  flexible  pen  (Brandauer  518).     Great  richness  and 
force  as  well  as  extreme  delicacy  may  be  obtained  by  such  means, 
much  as  in  a  dry-point. 
148 


SKETCHES,    STUDIES   AND   "  FINISH  "  149 

The  aim  is  taken  and  the  trigger  pulled,  and  Fate 
decides  the  rest.  To  watch  elderly  gentlemen  at  billiards, 
or  at  bowls,  urging  with  fantastic  contortions  and  exhorta- 
tions an  unwilling  servant  in  the  shape  of  ball  or  bowl,  is 
to  see  the  futility  of  endeavouring  to  correct  whatever 
mistake  has  been  made  in  the  exercise  of  the  first  intention. 

A  sketch  is  necessarily  limited,  having  for  its  success 
as  uncomplicated  an  issue  as  possible.  It  should  not  be 
"  fired  into  the  brown  "  on  the  off  chance  of  bringing 
something  down,  but  should  confine  itself  to  a  single 
bird.  Of  any  given  subject  there  are,  of  course,  many 
aspects,  so  that  for  or  of  it  many  sketches  may  be  made. 
The  line  arrangement,  the  colour  scheme,  or  the  chiaroscuro 
may  each  call  for  a  separate  and  impulsive  attack,  each 
in  turn  being  treated  as  of  the  utmost  importance.  From 
these  will  arise  a  knowledge  of  the  subject,  and  a  clearing 
up  of  the  mind's  intentions,  that  should  find  an  issue 
in  the  full  and  more  complex,  or  even  better,  more  simple 
expression  to  be  attempted  later. 

For  here  is  the  difference — or  at  least  one  difference — 
between  a  "  sketch  "  and  a  "  study."  The  sketch  is 
rather  a  clearing  of  the  mind,  a  putting  on  record  of 
intentions,  thoughts,  or  ideas  uncomplicated  by  a  critical 
attitude  or  reference  to  any  standard  but  its  own.  It 
is,  therefore,  as  far  as  a  work  can  be,  the  expression  of 
the  subjective  side  of  the  artist's  mind.  The  "  study  " 
is  undertaken  with  a  view  to  filling  up  those  gaps  that 
exist  in  the  knowledge  or  in  the  mind  with  information 
pertinent  to  the  matter  in  hand. 

The  sketch  will  be  the  most  intensely  emotional  and 
unhesitating  expression  of  the  artist's  personality,  and 
the  "  study  "  the  more  altruistic  and  tentative,  as  its 
object  is  the  taking  into  the  mind,  while  also  recording, 


150  LINE 

something  outside  itself,  rather  than  primarily  external- 
izing a  thought.  The  sketch  is  the  means  of  giving  out 
from,  and  the  study  a  means  of  taking  into,  the  mind,  an 
artistically  egoistic  and  explosive  expression  of  personality 
for  its  own  sake  in  one  case,  and  hi  the  other  a  record  of 
an  impression  upon  it  with  an  ulterior  purpose,  generally 
of  an  informing  nature  for  the  artist  himself,  or  for 
exercise  in  craftsmanship.  One  generally  runs  into  the 
other,  but  here  is  the  main  difference. 

Essays  or  studies  should  be  made  not  only  with  a  view 
to  acquiring  knowledge  of  external  things,  but  also  to 
decide  upon  the  appropriate  treatment  of  what  it  is 
desired  to  express  in  accordance  with  the  requirements 
of  any  given  case. 

Where  information  is  the  main  object  in  a  study,  the 
style  of  setting  it  out  is  of  secondary  importance;  but 
after  the  capacity  for  making  a  plain  and  accurate  state- 
ment (which  every  student  should  be  able  to  acquire) 
has  been  achieved,  a  habit  of  setting  it  down  in  an  inter- 
esting as  well  as  a  truthful  manner  should  follow. 

The  artist's  interest  and  activity  of  mind  is  generally 
shown  in  his  selection  from,  rather  than  by  his  sleepy 
acquiescence  in,  whatever  is  put  before  his  eyes.  Selec- 
tion involves  rejection,  and  does,  of  course,  in  itself  involve 
an  emphasis. 

The  "  finished  "  drawing  is  not  simply  a  tidying  up  of 
loose  ends,  a  stippling,  smoothing  out  and  filling  up,  as 
is  so  commonly  supposed. 

"  Finish  "  is  relevance,  and  nothing  else — the  inclusion 
of  what  matters,  and  the  exclusion  of  everything  else. 
To  introduce  anything  that  distracts  from  the  calm  con- 
templation of  the  essential  fact  or  idea  is  actively  to 
unfinish  it.  A  "  sketch  "  or  "  study  "  may  be  a  finished 


"  THE  MAN  WITH  THE  MUCK  RAKE  " 

In  spite  of  the  looseness,  commonly  called  "  sketchiness,"  of  handling, 
the  artist  considers  this  drawing  to  be  as  "  finished  "  as  any  of  his 
drawings,  the  attempt  having  been  to  render  a  certain  type  of  emotion 
in   the   technique  itself. 


152  LINE 

work  of  art,  and  in  the  hands  of  a  master  generally  is  so, 
though  it  be  but  a  pair  of  hands.  Just  as  the  best  orna- 
ment will  be  subservient  to  and  emphasize  construction, 
and  the  finer  the  construction  the  less  ornament  will  be 
required,  so  "  finish  "  is  a  matter  of  simplification  rather 
than  of  elaboration.  The  tale  of  the  charwoman  and  of 
the  doorstep  ladies  with  arms  akimbo  is  never  finished, 
being  equally  emphatic  all  through,  all  its  parts  having 
equal  importance.  Time  alone  brings  it  to  a  pause,  rather 
than  to  a  conclusion. 

The  sketch  and  the  study  may  both  precede  the  finished 
drawing,  and  clear  the  way  for  its  accomplishment. 

Both  should  be  kept  at  hand,  or  it  will  almost  inevitably 
happen  that,  in  the  critical  endeavour  to  improve  upon 
them,  their  peculiar  vitality  will  be  lost  by  an  evaporation 
that  only  a  constant  reference  back  to  them  will  check. 

Every  artist  knows,  to  his  sorrow,  how  easy  it  appears 
to  improve  upon  a  sketch  which  he  has  made  under  a 
happy  and  excited  impulse,  and  at  the  time  thought  little 
of,  and  has  cast  aside,  only  to  find  how  far  the  labori- 
ously "  finished  "  performance  falls  short  in  all  but  its 
laboriousness. 

There  is,  or  was,  a  curious  pleasure  taken  by  the  Philis- 
tine in  the  evidence  of  much  time  and  painful  labour 
bestowed  by  the  artist  upon  his  work,  instead  of  ease 
and  joy  in  its  fulfilment.  This  painful  labour  in  the 
result  shows,  rather,  slipshod  preparation  in  the  begin- 
ning, and  gives  no  pleasure  to  any  but  the  ignorant 
or  the  callous.  It  calls  for  pitying  contempt  for  a 
person  who  makes  a  fuss  over  the  hardship  of  his  lot 
and  the  difficulty  of  his  job.  It  is  a  breach  of  artistic 
etiquette,  as  of  a  conjurer  whose  tricks  are  clumsily 
performed  for  want  of  practice  in  them.  On  the  other 


SKETCHES,    STUDIES    AND    "  FINISH  "  153 

hand,  the  nonchalance  that  is  sometimes  affected,  of 
"  knocking  a  little  thing  off,"  is  if  anything  more  irritating. 
Thackeray  said,  "  Your  easy  writing  makes  damned  hard 
reading,"  and  the  saying  might  be  adapted  to  apply  to 
a  certain  type  of  facile  draughtsmanship  which  is  far  too 
common.  It  is  not  only  irrelevant  in  parts,  but  altogether, 
like  whistling  in  church,  or  autograph  albums. 

In  the  East,  particularly  in  the  finest  work  of  the 
Chinese,  it  would  appear  to  be  a  point  of  honour  with 
the  artist  to  show  no  signs  of  hesitation  or  fumbling  in 
the  finished  work — so  to  have  studied  every  stroke  before- 
hand that  only  the  quintessential  thought  shall  appear, 
so  that  a  drawing  is  as  perfectly  condensed  as  a  sonnet  of 
Shakespeare's.  It  might  almost  be  said  that  as  rigid 
rules  had  been  established  for  the  limitation  of  a  picture 
to  a  given  number  of  lines  or  strokes  as  those  by  which  the 
poet  limits  his  sonnet  to  fourteen  lines  of  ten  or  eleven 
syllables.  In  England  we  are  generally  more  lavish  and 
slipshod,  as  though  Swinburne  should  have  accepted  the 
commission  given  by  a  noble  editor  to  write  a  sonnet  for 
his  magazine  to  run  to  "  not  more  than  five  or  six  pages." 

Necessity  for  Original  Observation 

The  necessity  of  using  their  own  eyes  not  only  in  the 
performance  of  set  studies,  but  as  they  go  about  the 
school,  and  out  of  it,  should  be  pressed  upon  students. 
It  is  the  things  with  which  we  are  most  familiar  that  in 
general  interest  us  least,  and  we  look  elsewhere  for 
romance  and  adventure,  not  seeing  that  it  is  only  our 
own  lack  of  appreciation  that  finds  ourselves  and  our 
lives  common  or  ordinary,  and  that  nothing  ever  happens. 

Almost  every  young  man  in  an  Art  School  begins  by 
wishing  to  draw  great  allegories,  and  the  young  girl  too 


154  LINE 

often  mistakes  the  drawing  of  fairies  on  toadstools  for 
original  imagination.  They  do  not  realize  how  often  they 
are  but  repeating  what  they  have  already  seen,  and  that 
it  is  more  imaginative  to  divine  the  romance  that  under- 
lies their  own  lives  and  is  inherent  in  their  own  surround- 
ings. The  fairies  and  the  allegories  will  both  be  better 
conceived  by  an  artist  with  a  knowledge  of  life  derived 
not  from  a  youthful  contempt  of  its  ordinariness,  but  from 
a  healthy  interest  in  the  daily  life  of  the  school,  of  home, 
and  in  the  man  in  the  train  or  street.  Who  can  draw 
from  memory  the  staircase  he  goes  up  and  down  twenty 
times  a  day,  or  the  familiar  door  even  of  the  house  he 
lives  in?  The  most  observant  artist  must  observe  in  a 
particular  way  in  order  to  do  such  things.  Phil  May,  who 
had  the  most  remarkable  capacity  for  drawing  a  portrait 
from  memory,  rarely  or  never  succeeded  in  drawing  a 
portrait  of  his  wife,  and  it  was  more  often  than  not  a 
chance  acquaintance  or  someone  unknown  to  him  whom 
he  introduced  into  his  drawings.  He  replied  to  my 
question  that  he  had  to  look  at  people  with  the  intention  of 
drawing  them  in  order  to  memorize  them  properly. 

Students  should  be  encouraged  to  draw  and  caricature 
each  other,  and  masters  should  not  be  offended  if  they 
find  themselves  not  too  flatteringly  handled.  It  should 
also  be  pointed  out  how  good  a  background  is  always 
to  be  found  in  the  Antique  or  modelling  rooms,  how  effec- 
tive is  the  lighting  and  grouping  of  a  set  of  students  at 
work,  and  how  graceful  is  the  natural  pose  of  anyone 
absorbed  at  any  task.  Many  students  never  observe 
groups  at  all,  concentrating  upon  individuals,  so  that  the 
establishment  of  the  relation  of  one  figure  to  another  is  a 
source  of  trouble  ever  afterwards. 

Even  if  such  observation  does  not  issue  in  actual  draw- 


ORIGINAL    OBSERVATION  155 

ing,  its  exercise  is  one  of  the  pleasantest  habits  of  the 
mind,  and  fills  even  a  journey  inside  a  'bus  with  interest. 
What  would  Holbein  make  of  the  fat  lady  opposite? 
And  with  what  different  eyes  would  Rembrandt  and  Keene 
have  viewed  her ! 

Observation  of  life  and  character  makes  the  drawing 
of  all  other  things  easier.  The  man  who  can  "  see  "  and 
draw  a  man  or  woman  can,  from  that  training,  and  its 
greater  complexity,  see  and  draw,  once  his  interest  has 
been  stirred,  a  mountain,  a  tree,  or  a  wave  better  than  one 
who  has  studied  only  the  wave,  the  tree,  or  the  mountain. 
Once  acquired  the  habit  will  never  desert  him,  even  should 
he  abandon  entirely  the  pursuit  of  Art;  and  if  it  does 
nothing  else  for  him,  it  is  likely  to  sweeten  his  passage 
through  life,  by  giving  him  a  perpetual  interest  outside 
himself. 

War  and  Art  Students. 

So  far  as  can  be  seen  as  yet,  the  war  has  had  little  effect 
upon  the  outlook  of  the  normal  student.  Those  who  left 
their  studies  and  returned  seem  in  the  main  to  look  upon 
the  war  as  a  hyphen  between  the  serious  businesses  of 
life — an  interruption  of  their  studies,  like  an  ill-spent 
vacation.  They  have  been  through  hell  and  appear  to 
have  forgotten.  War,  as  subject-matter  of  Art,  does  not 
seem  to  occur  to  them,  and  they  go  contentedly  and 
docilely  through  the  same  old  curriculum  with  an  almost 
pathetic  deference  to  its  very  mild  authority. 

What  effect  the  war  will  have  eventually  remains  to  be 
seen.  It  has  not  even  yet  been  digested.  A  generation 
is  growing  up  whose  first  recollections  are  of  a  state  of 
war,  to  whom  "  peace  "  so-called  is  a  new  experience. 


156  LINE 

Every  type  of  character  is  represented  in  a  school. 
It  isn't,  of  course,  the  business  of  a  school  to  teach 
the  many  varieties  of  character  presented  to  it,  what 
to  express,  but  how  to  express  themselves,  and  to 
induce  a  knowledge  of  whatever  special  gifts  may  be 
theirs.  Many  ex-service  men  received  grants  to  enable 
them  to  study  Art  as  an  eventual  means  of  earning  a 
living  by  it ;  and  the  readiest  field  open  to  them  appearing 
to  be  the  application  of  Art  to  commercial  purposes,  it 
is  likely  that  the  level  of  popular  taste  may  be  somewhat 
improved  by  its  becoming  accustomed  to  the  artistic 
appeal.  The  risk  is  that  in  the  rush  of  preparation  of 
great  numbers  of  men,  and  their  necessity  to  earn  an 
immediate  living  by  such  means,  the  standard  of  what  is 
considered  "  good  enough  "  may  be  kept  too  low.  The 
"  practical  man  "  in  the  educational  world,  who  considers 
that  he  has  done  well  as  soon  as  he  has  "  put  a  living  into 
a  man's  hands,"  may  defeat  his  ideal  by  lowering  the 
standard  and  so  cheapening  work  to  a  point  that  a  living 
by  that  means  is  little  but  an  existence.  It  is  not  always 
bad  for  the  business  if  a  little  of  the  dream  should  penetrate 
the  multitude  of  it.  The  highest  business  of  a  School  of 
Art  is  the  training  of  taste — higher  even  than  its  elemen- 
tary duty  of  training  in  skill. 

It  is  sometimes  overlooked  in  the  training  of  students 
for  commercial  work  that  forcefulness  can  be  achieved 
without  violence  or  vulgarity,  in  posters  as  in  other 
affairs.  In  advertising  a  suggestion  is  more  persuasive 
than  a  command  of  the  "this  means  you  "  order. 

If  the  primary  object  be  to  call  attention,  other  con- 
siderations come  in.  In  sound  there  is  all  the  difference 
between  a  motor-horn  and  a  carillon.  The  honking  road- 
hog  with  his  peremptory  "  get  out  of  the  way  "  apparatus, 


ART   STUDENTS  157 

such  as  is  advertised  as  "  very  authoritative,"  and  the 
announcement  to  a  dreaming  city  that  another  quarter 
is  gently  passing,  so  leisured  that  the  four  quarters  are 
rilled  with  the  music  of  their  passing  in  an  almost  continu- 
ous chime,  present  some  of  these  in  an  obvious  manner. 

Attention  may  be  called  so  violently — so  shockingly 
indeed — that  the  mind  revolts  against  the  giving  of  it 
and  reacts  with  added  force  against  so  churlish  a  command. 
Just  so  with  certain  pictorial  commands ;  there  are  certain 
soups,  certain  boluses,  certain  soaps,  that  we  would  rather 
go  ill,  go  dirty,  go  hungry,  than  wash  with,  eat,  or  swallow 
— all  of  them,  soup,  soap  and  pills,  assault  our  eyes  in  the 
manner  of  the  road-hog.  We  get  out  of  their  way  as  for 
our  own  safety. 

Sometimes  the  most  effective  advertisement  is  one  that 
in  a  noisy  world  whispers  in  the  ear  quite  close,  while  the 
noise  and  shouting  of  the  crowd  cancel  out  into  a  roaring 
background  where  no  individual  voice  is  discernible.  It 
is  remarkable  with  how  little  effort  a  voice  of  the  right 
quality  and  pitch  can  carry,  and  it  is  believable  that  a 
child's  or  a  woman's  untried  clarity  might  be  heard  through 
the  husky  bellowing  of  a  herd  of  bulls.  So  with  a  work  of 
distinction  rightly  judged.  Modesty  of  appeal  will  gain 
more  from  any  person  of  spirit  than  a  ruffianly  command. 

Students  join  up  generally  with  the  vaguest  ideas  of 
what  they  want  to  express,  sometimes  with  the  crudest 
notions  of  the  good  and  bad  in  Art,  having  seen  nothing 
higher,  frequently  enough,  than  the  lurid  wrappers  of 
books  and  the  cheaper  Press.  These  should  be  confronted 
as  soon  as  possible  with  the  best  of  the  kind  of  thing  they 
admire,  so  that  they  may  see  that  differences  and  degrees 
exist,  even  in  the  abyss.  Some,  no  matter  what  their 
upbringing,  are  gifted  by  Nature  with  a  flair  for  the  best, 


158  LINE 

and  these  aim  directly  at  it  as  soon  as  seen,  without  the 
necessity  of  its  being  pointed  out. 

Reproductions  of  the  best  work  of  all  styles,  countries 
and  periods  should  be  readily  available  as  examples, 
though  the  best  influences  will  generally  prove  to  be  those 
who  were  the  strictest  in  drawing,  such  as  Holbein,  Diirer, 
and  Botticelli,  and  those  masters  of  selection  and  observa- 
tion and  stylish  disposal  of  space,  the  Chinese  and  Japanese. 
Of  moderns,  Ingres  and  Alfred  Stevens  are  both  good 
influences,  and  might  well  be  studied  together,  since 
either  cancels  out  to  some  extent  any  tendency  to  excess 
or  weakness  in  the  other. 


XIV 

BEAUTY 

So  far  as  we  are  concerned  in  what  is  called  the  creation 
of  any  work,  all  that  can  be  said  is  that  Beauty  consists 
in  exactitude  of  application  to  purpose,  which  will  imply 
the  greatest  economy  of  force  to  a  given  end. 

A  square  peg  in  a  round  hole  is  the  antithesis  of  Beauty. 

The  definition  of  dirt  as  "  matter  in  the  wrong  place  " 
is  admirable. 

The  quality  of  squareness  in  a  peg  is  not  in  itself  admir- 
able, nor,  on  the  other  hand,  is  roundness.  Of  two  pegs, 
one  perfectly  round,  the  other  perfectly  square,  what  is 
there  to  choose,  all  other  things  being  equal?  Each 
implies  a  purpose  or  design,  so  that  neither  is  beautiful 
unless  it  fulfils  the  condition  laid  down  in  the  purpose 
—to  fit. 

An  unrelated  quality  as  smoothness,  yellowness,  cool- 
ness, dryness,  brightness,  has  not  in  itself  Beauty.  The 
quality  must  be  appropriate. 

It  cannot  be  said  that  a  cube  is  more  beautiful  than  a 
sphere,  except  it  be  better  adapted  to  its  end,  otherwise 
our  lovers  might  be  sighing  in  the  rays  of  a  cubical  moon. 

A  billiard  ball  is  a  beautiful  billiard  ball  according  to 
its  capacity  for  accurate  rolling,  which  is  in  exact  accord- 
ance with  its  sphericity — its  singleness  or  impartiality  of 
surface;  a  die  is  beautiful  in  accordance  with  its  exact 
partiality  into  six  surfaces,  so  that  there  may  be  no  doubt 
as  to  which  side  lies  uppermost.  While  in  both  die  and 

159 


FROM  "  A  DREAM  OF  FAIR  WOMEN  " 

An   attempt  to  combine  severity  of  line  with  richness  of  modelling 

and  colour.     In  the  dark  passages   the  white    spaces   become  more 

important  than  the  black  lines  which  include  them. 


BEAUTY  l6l 

billiard  ball  exactitude  of  balance  is  called  for,  a  bias  is 
put  upon  bowls.  Gilbert's  fancy  of  a  "  cloth  untrue 
with  a  twisted  cue  and  elliptical  billiard  balls  "  as  a  punish- 
ment to  fit  the  crime  of  the  billiard  sharp,  and  Lewis 
Carroll's  flamingo's  neck  as  a  croquet  mallet,  have  the 
beauty  that  belongs  to  the  purpose  of  stirring  our  risible 
faculties  by  tickling  our  sense  of  the  incongruity  of  the 
instrument  with  purpose — an  unexplainable  "  cussed- 
ness,"  a  kink  in  things  that  mars  the  perfect  order. 

The  crux  comes  when  we  begin  to  consider  those  things 
either  inside  or  outside  ourselves  where  the  purpose  is 
obscure  or  entirely  beyond  out  comprehension,  which 
yet  excite  pleasure  in  the  contemplative  mind. 

What  is  to  be  said  of  those  beauties  that  exist  without 
purpose,  so  far,  that  is,  as  we  can  see  or  realize  the  purpose, 
as  in  a  sunset,  a  rose,  or  a  butterfly  ? — all  these  appearing 
to  squander  a  quite  unnecessary  loveliness  out  of  pro- 
portion to  any  useful  purpose  so  far  as  the  materialist 
can  see. 

What  are  these  but  ornament  without  economy  ?  Does 
the  flower  of  the  rose  contain  more  beauty  than  its  thorn, 
the  placid  sunset  more  beauty  than  the  thunderstorm,  or 
the  butterfly  more  than  the  worm,  since  each  equally 
serves  a  purpose,  and  the  purpose  served  being  frequently 
more  readily  appreciable  in  accordance  with  the  obvious- 
ness of  the  purpose  ? 

We  must  reckon  here,  I  think,  with  the  purposes  of 
our  own  life,  and  the  beauty  implanted  in  our  own  minds. 
This  may  sound  like  begging  the  question,  but  we  must 
admit  mystery  here.  "  Not  every  height  is  holiness,  nor 
every  sweetness  good." 

A  child  with  the  most  limited  range  of  association  will 

love  bright  colour  for  its  own  sake,  and  will  prefer  the  pink 
M 


l62  LINE 

part  of  the  blanc-mange  to  the  white,  though  there  be  no 
appreciable  difference  in  flavour.  Hereditary  instinct 
will  not  guard  it  against  yew  berries  or  deadly  nightshade, 
and  horses  and  cattle  are  frequently  poisoned  by  the  yew, 
apparently  by  a  wanton  malice  on  the  part  of  Nature. 
Offensiveness  of  this  kind,  so  far  from  proving  protective, 
might  well  have  led  to  the  entire  extinction  of  the  yew 
and  of  nightshade,  by  leading  to  a  vendetta  against  the 
offender. 

We  love  roses  for  the  unexplained  pleasure  which  they 
yield  to  the  senses  of  scent  and  sight,  apart  from  any 
obvious  purposes  they  may  serve  other  than  these  grati- 
fications ;  we  rear  them,  not  for  propagation  of  their  own 
kind,  but  for  our  own  gratification,  to  the  extent  that  we 
perfect  the  regularity  of  their  form,  and  the  delicacy  of 
their  scent  and  colour ;  we  assist  in  the  recreation  of  loveli- 
ness ;  but  what  is  it  primarily  that  impels  us  to  appreciate 
the  original  flower  in  its  form,  colour  and  scent — since 
the  wild  rose  apparently  served  little  other  end  than  its 
own  will  to  live  ?  and  in  what  does  that  differ  from  the 
nettle  ? 

The  purpose  of  creation  of  a  work  may  be  ugly,  yet 
what  more  beautiful  objects  have  been  wrought  by  man 
than  his  perfected  weapons  of  destruction,  from  the 
sword  and  the  stiletto  to  the  rifle  and  the  man-o'-war  ? 

Balance,  sharpness,  line  and  appropriate  ornament, 
either  for  deadliness  or  display,  in  the  blade,  the  hilt 
and  the  scabbard,  these  are  examples  of  fitness  for  purpose. 

As  to  mankind  itself,  it  is  beautiful  in  proportion  to  its 
economical  adaptation  to  the  purpose  of  its  own  being. 
To  put  sand  in  the  wheels  of  the  social  machine  is  an  ugly 
act,  no  matter  how  profitable  it  may  appear  for  the  moment 
to  the  individual.  Being  anti-social  he  will  be  destroyed 


BEAUTY  163 

as  soon  as  society  can  lay  hands  upon  him,  so  that  his 
destruction  is  to  all  intents  and  purposes  suicide,  as 
surely  as  a  murderer  who  is  hanged  may  be  said  to  have 
destroyed  himself  as  well  as  another.  This  is  uneconomical, 
a  waste  of  two  lives,  good  and  bad  together  —  altogether 
an  ugly  business. 

All  waste  is  ugly. 

The  best  use  is  economy;  so  that  we  come  to  this, 
that  utility  and  beauty  are  allied.  Cutting  blocks  with 
razors  is  a  waste  of  razors,  it  is  inappropriate  —  therefore 


The  most  useful  of  its  kind  will  be  the  most  beautiful 
of  its  kind. 

The  highly  specialized  for  a  particular  purpose,  though 
to  some  extent  incapacitated  for  general  use,  will  have 
a  highly  specialized  beauty;  as  a  shire  horse  for  slow 
strength,  and  a  thoroughbred  for  speed,  or  a  bull-dog  for 
tenacity  and  a  greyhound  for  swiftness. 

Their  relative  beauty  will  depend  upon  the  relative 
value  set  upon  these  qualities;  so  that  as  these  qualities 
may  be  more  or  less  in  demand  at  different  times,  so  will 
their  beauty  or  otherwise  vary  in  the  minds  of  men. 

It  is  possible  that  the  general  agreement  upon  the 
so-called  "  classic  "  type  of  beauty  arises  from  the  small 
degree  of  specialization  for  any  particular  purpose  —  the 
small  amount  of  raciality  involved,  let  us  say,  in  the  Venus 
de  Milo,  so  that,  except  for  the  dignity  and  grandeur 
with  which  the  sculptor  has  invested  her,  she  may  be  said 
to  contain  all  the  possibilities  of,  and  therefore  to  repre- 
sent, all  women  to  all  men  rather  than  any  particular 
individual  or  characteristic. 

Such  a  summary  presentation  is  only  to  be  achieved 
by  great  knowledge;  and  to  attempt  such,  as  so  many 


164  LINE 

artists  do,  without  that  knowledge,  by  a  simple  repetition 
of  type,  is  to  run  upon  failure.  The  safe  way  is  to  aim  at 
a  full  appreciation  and  selective  presentation  of  character 
as  the  artist  himself  sees  and  feels  it,  not  squeezing  an 
arbitrary  mould  upon  the  living  character,  and  suppressing 
its  variations,  but  accepting,  and  even  emphasizing,  what- 
ever deviation  may  appear  from  the  normal. 

Here  is  an  indication  of  two  attitudes  or  two  conceptions 
of  Beauty — one  that  shall  "  blend,  transcend  them  all," 
by  presenting  to  our  view  a  bouquet  of  all  the  flowers, 
carefully  cultivated  without  thorns  or  weeds ;  and  another 
that  shall  not  only  recognize  but  display  with  a  nicely 
proportioned  emphasis  one  individual  flower  at  a  time, 
not  only  in  what  to  a  superficial  view  is  its  perfection 
alone,  but  even  the  defects  of  its  qualities,  which  to  a  large 
mind  and  a  deep-seeing  eye  are  part  of  its  true  perfection, 
just  as  a  day  contains  darkness  as  well  as  light. 

Portraiture  of  individuals  comes  within  the  latter  cate- 
gory, and  the  beauty  of  a  portrait  will  reside  rather  in  its 
specialization  of  character  than  in  its  conformity  with 
a  conventional  type. 

The  purpose  of  a  work  of  art  will  dictate  which  point 
of  view  the  artist  should  adopt — whether  stress  should 
be  laid  upon  the  type  or  upon  the  individual. 

A  picture  of  a  drawing-room  scene  of  to-day  in  which 
attempt  should  be  made  to  represent  all  the  women 
according  to  a  single  type  of  Venus,  and  all  the  men  as 
Adonis,  would  fail  in  the  dignity  aimed  at,  since  it  would 
fall  into  pomposity  and  absurdity  by  reason  of  its  palpable 
untruth  to  familiar  facts. 

All  may  be  well,  but  there  can  be,  in  an  imperfect 
world,  but  one  best.  That  there  may  be  many  kinds  of 
goodness  and  so  many  varieties  of  "  best  "  is  a  blessing. 


BEAUTY  165 

Just  as  "  dirt  is  matter  in  the  wrong  place,"  so  there 
can  be  no  pleasure  derived  from  Beauty  misapplied. 
Here  again  is  lack  of  economy.  For  the  rough  work  of 
the  world  rough  tools  and  means  are  requisite. 

It  is  distressing  to  see  a  sculptor  impatiently  polishing 
the  marble  before  he  has  finished  with  the  punch  and  chisel. 
Such  a  work  can  never  be  finished  because  it  has  not  been 
properly  begun.  In  a  drawing,  if  pattern,  no  matter  how 
beautiful  in  itself,  be  applied  to  a  weak  construction  in 
order  to  conceal  its  weakness,  or,  worse  still,  to  take  its 
place,  nothing  but  irritation  can  be  the  result  for  any  but 
shallow  minds.  Construction  must  take  precedence  of 
pattern  or  ornament,  and  only  ignorance  or  vulgarity  can 
hold  otherwise. 

A  jug  that  will  not  pour,  or  a  table  that  will  not  stand 
steady  because  in  either  case  considerations  of  ornament 
have  preceded  considerations  of  the  purpose  of  the  thing 
designed,  is  an  ugly  jug  or  an  ugly  table. 

Armour  loses  its  beauty  as  soon  as  its  protective  value  is 
lost  sight  of,  or  replaced  by  its  decorative  value,  so  that 
it  becomes  an  encumbrance.  The  sons  of  King  Gama  in 
Gilbert  and  Sullivan's  Princess  Ida,  inaesthetic  as  they 
imagined  themselves,  and  contemptuous  of  such  matters, 
were  acting  in  accordance  with  the  canons  of  taste  when 
they  preferred  to  fight  in  shirt-sleeves.  The  armourer 
had  become  a  poor  artist,  and  it  is  to  be  supposed  that  a 
Cockney  youth,  who  could  manage  with  a  length  of  his 
washerwoman  mother's  clothes-line  to  trip  up  the  most 
gallant  knight,  could  have  him  at  his  mercy  though  he 
himself  were  armed  with  no  better  weapons  than  the  coke- 
hammer  and  the  bread-knife.  Here  is  a  reduction  to  the 
absurd,  which  Beauty  cannot  be. 

Meanwhile  the  beauty  of  roses  troubles  us. 


166  LINE 

Is  it  roses,  or  is  it  ourselves,  that  more  demands  explana- 
tion is  this  particular  ? 

Where  is  the  economy  of  a  sunset  or  a  rose  ?  Or  is  it 
in  us  that  economy  is  being  exercised  ?  And  that  having 
a  mental  hunger  food  is  provided  for  it  ? 

What  is  the  purpose  of  a  rose  in  its  relation  to  us,  or 
of  us  in  relation  to  a  rose,  that  we  should  become  excited 
over  their  presence  before  our  eyes  or  in  our  memory  ? 

Why  do  we  compare  a  rose  favourably  with  other  well- 
loved  flowers?  Besides,  there  are  many  varieties  of 
roses,  each  more  beautiful  than  the  other ;  one  we  admire 
for  its  size,  another  for  its  smallness ;  one  for  its  redness, 
another  for  its  whiteness ;  one  because  it  is  nearly  black, 
another  that  its  pallor  is  hardly  flushed ;  one  for  its  double- 
ness,  another  for  its  open  singleness  and  simplicity.  What 
is  here  but  flat  contradictoriness  in  such  reasons  as  we 
assign  to  our  appreciation  of  them  ?  Nor  do  we  question 
them  as  to  the  purpose  of  their  existence,  nor  demand 
the  least  explanation  from  them  as  to  how  they  are  justified 
by  anything  but  their  beauty,  or,  what  comes  to  the  same 
thing  (does  it? — or  doesn't  it?),  the  beauty  we  find  in 
them.  Does  the  beauty  of  roses  exist  in  roses  themselves 
or  in  our  love  of  them  ?  Is  it  roses  we  love,  or  the  grati- 
fication they  give  us  ? 

Tennyson's  "  Day  Dream  "  comes  to  mind  here  : 

"  So,  Lady  Flora,  take  my  lay, 

And  if  you  find  no  moral  there, 
Go,  look  in  any  glass  and  say, 

What  moral  is  in  being  fair. 
Oh,  to  what  uses  shall  we  put 

The  wildweed-flower  that  simply  blows  ? 
And  is  there  any  moral  shut 

Within  the  bosom  of  the  rose  ?  " 

It  is  one  of  the  questions  that  will  tease  humanity  to  the 
end — riddles  which  we  cannot  answer,  and  yet  must  go 


" LADY  FLORA  " 

An   attempt  to   achieve  richness   without  sacrifice  of  the  underlying 
severity  of  line,  which  is  very  heavy  in  order  to  support  the  superposed 

"  colour." 


167 


l68  LINE 

on  eternally  seeking  to  find  out.  If  we  could  solve  the 
mystery,  would  Beauty  remain? 

Certain  abstractions  such  as  Unity,  and  Variety  in 
Unity,  Harmony,  Proportion  and  the  like  are  put  forward 
as  essential  qualities  of  Beauty,  but  each  of  these  may  be 
as  hard  to  define  as  Beauty  itself. 

It  would  be  necessary  to  examine  the  bases  of  sensation 
themselves  to  arrive  at  any  satisfactory  solution  of  only 
the  first  of  the  many  facets  to  the  question,  "  What  is 
Beauty?  " 

In  the  case  of  sight  with  which  we  are  immediately 
concerned,  association  alone  is  not  sufficient  guide.  Red 
in  its  many  degrees  may  be  associated  with  sunset,  with 
apples,  with  deadly  nightshade  and  with  blood ;  with  food, 
with  contentment  and  rest,  with  poison,  with  horror; 
with  good  and  bad  equally.  If  this  is  the  case,  association 
of  ideas  alone  is  not  enough  to  account  for  our  appreciation 
of  colour;  and  if  of  colour,  why  not  in  other  matters 
also?  That  association  is  not  necessarily  the  basis  of 
our  pleasure  in  colour  may  readily  be  proved  by  deciding 
whether  we  prefer  the  appearance  of  the  red  or  the  green 
railway  signal  against  the  night  sky.  The  general  choice 
will  probably  be  the  red,  in  spite  of  its  being  well  known  to 
all  as  the  danger  signal. 

Colour  will  appeal  to  the  sense  more  than  to  the  mind, 
being  an  attribute  of  form ;  but  form  that  does  not  appeal 
to  the  reason,  and  so  offends  it,  either  on  account  of  its 
chaotic  condition,  its  ineptitude  for  purpose,  cannot 
please  a  fastidious  mind.  The  mind  demands  construc- 
tion and  purpose  in  form,  and  unless  this  demand  is  met, 
not  only  is  the  mind  not  satisfied,  but  is  actively  dis- 
satisfied and  resentment  is  set  up. 

Discoloration,    as    being   inappropriate    to    the    object 


BEAUTY  l6g 

coloured,  will  also  stir  resentment  in  the  same  way,  though 
the  colour  may  not  in  itself  be  unlovely.  Green  or  yellow 
cheeks,  for  instance,  a  jaundiced  or  cadaverous  complex- 
ion, just  as  an  excess  of  red,  may  be  definitely  unpleasant 
to  the  mind.  But  "  discoloration  "  involves  an  association 
of  ideas;  in  the  given  case  of  green  cheeks  implying  an 
unhealthy  state  of  body  or  an  affectation  suggestive 
of  vicious  taste,  as  opposed  to  pink  as  implying 
health  and  naturalness.  The  same  shade  that  would  be 
unpleasant  upon  a  cheek  may  in  itself  give  pleasure  in  a 
scheme  of  decoration  for  a  wall  or  a  china  vase,  where  no 
particular  thing  is  represented  or  even  suggested,  so  that 
the  association  of  ideas  is,  if  present  at  all,  so  vague  and 
remote  that  it  may  be  dismissed  as  the  basis  of  our  sensa- 
tion of  pleasure.  A  vivid  green  or  yellow  reflection 
upon  a  face  as  apart  from  the  local  colour  may,  on  the 
other  hand,  give  exquisite  pleasure,  and  that  of  the  most 
innocent  order,  as  from  the  bright  green  reflections  of 
sunlit  grass,  or  of  yellow,  as  when  children  test  each  other 
for  "  how  much  they  love  butter  "  with  a  fresh-pulled 
and  glossy  buttercup  held  under  the  chin. 

A  face  under  a  green  or  red  sunshade,  in  firelight,  or 
near  a  coloured  lamp-shade  may  remain  beautiful,  may 
even  be  beautified,  though  it  be  reddened  to  the  hue  of 
a  toper's,  made  crimson  as  a  beetroot,  or  orange  as  a 
carrot.  The  colour  being  an  attribute  of  the  light  and 
not  of  the  object  upon  which  it  falls,  these  associations  do 
not  present  themselves  to  the  mind,  which  may  be 
delighted  either  by  strangeness,  which  may  be  called  an 
inverted  association,  a  dissociation  that  is  from  ordinary 
experience  or  a  departure  from  the  normal,  or  by  that 
unexplained  pleasure  which  we  take  in  colour  for  its  own 
sake,  as  giving  comfort  to  the  eye.  This  comfort  to  the 


170  LINE 

eye  may  arise  from  two  extremities  of  cause — either  of 
rest  or  of  excitement. 

Lady  Burton,  the  wife  of  Sir  Richard  Burton,  the 
explorer  and  translator  of  the  Arabian  Nights,  explained 
that  she  wished  all  her  carpets  and  wall  decorations  to  be 
green,  as  a  rest  to  the  eyes  after  so  long  time  spent  in 
hot,  sandy  and  arid  places.  On  the  other  hand,  the  red 
blind  of  an  inn  on  a  cold  night  will  delight  the  half-frozen 
traveller  with  its  communicated  sense  of  warmth. 
Children,  young  people  and  savages  like  bright  colours, 
just  as  they  like  strong  flavours,  and  to  express  themselves 
gaily,  while  old  sobersides  may  prefer  subtle  variations 
from  the  neutral  in  cool  greys,  fawns  and  such-like  tertiary 
colours,  suitable  to  one  who  is  content  to  occupy  the 
background  of  life,  or  as  a  gourmet,  to  whom  a  hint  of  a 
flavour  is  sufficient. 

Heraldic  Colours  as  represented  in  Black  and  White. 

The  poetry  of  Keats  is  filled  with  glory  of  colour,  like 
the  heart  of  a  rose.  It  is  for  this  pictorial  sense  of  glowing 
splendour  that  two  of  his  verses  have  become  so  widely 
known  and  endeared  to  those  who  know  them  : 

"  A  casement  high  and  triple-arched  there  was 
All  garlanded  with  carven  imag'ries 
Of  fruits  and  flowers,  and  bunches  of  knot  grass, 
And  diamonded  with  panes  of  quaint  device, 
Innumerable  of  stains  and  splendid  dyes, 
As  are  the  tiger-moth's  deep-damask'd  wings ; 
And  in  the  midst,  'mong  many  thousand  heraldries 
And  twilight  saints,  and  dim  emblazonings, 
A  shielded  scutcheon  blush'd  with  blood  of  queens  and  kings. 

"  Full  on  this  casement  shone  the  wintry  moon, 
And  threw  warm  gules  on  Madeline's  fair  breast, 
As  down  she  knelt  for  heaven's  grace  and  boon ; 
Rose-bloom  fell  on  her  hands,  together  prest, 
And  on  her  silver  cross  soft  amethyst, 
And  on  her  hair  a  glory  like  a  saint ; 
She  seemed  a  splendid  angel,  newly  drest, 
Save  wings,  for  heaven  :   Porphyro  grew  faint : 
She  knelt  so  pure  a  thing,  so  free  from  mortal  taint." 


HERALDIC   COLOURS  171 

It  may  not  be  generally  known  that  there  is  a  recog- 
nized series  of  symbols  to  be  employed  in  the  black  and 
white  representation  of  heraldic  devices  by  which  the 
colours  are  indicated.  Thus  a  dotted  ground  represents 
"or,"  or  gold,  parallel  vertical  lines  "gules"  or  red, 
parallel  horizontal  lines  azure,  or  blue,  cross-hatched 
lines  sable,  and  diagonal  lines  "  purpure  "  or  "  vert," 
purple  and  green,  according  to  their  direction. 

Mr.  Emery  Walker,  of  high  authority  in  such  matters,  has 
assured  the  author  that  such  indications  are  not  necessary, 
and  that  it  rests  with  the  taste  of  the  draughtsman  whether 
or  not  he  should  employ  them.  Particularly  in  small 
drawings  to  be  printed  with  type,  such  indications  are 
frequently  better  left  out  altogether,  as  they  may  interfere 
seriously  with  the  clarity  of  the  heraldic  design. 

Any  artist  who  proposes  to  employ  heraldry  for  any 
purpose,  such  as  a  book  plate,  should  consult  a  handbook 
on  the  subject,  not  only  to  get  his  heraldry  correct,  but 
also  that  he  may  employ  a  good  and  appropriate  style. 
Stationers'  heraldry  became  very  florid  and  debased.  The 
best  is  never  realistic,  but  highly  conventionalized,  clear 
and  simple,  its  original  purpose  being  to  be  recognized  by 
all  at  a  glance. 

A  hint  might  be  taken  from  this  heraldic  method  of 
indication  of  colour  in  making  sketches  from  Nature  in 
pencil  or  other  black-and-white  medium,  as  a  reminder 
of  the  colours  and  tones  of  objects;  and  it  should  not  be 
difficult  for  an  artist  so  to  elaborate  a  code  of  his  own 
composed  of  lines  and  dots  as  to  make  truly  valuable 
memoranda  in  this  manner  in  his  sketch-book,  instead 
of  the  somewhat  vague  written  notes  generally  found. 


172  LINE 

The  Pursuit  of  Beauty. 

The  objects  in  the  artist's  mind,  apart  from  his  un- 
explained impulse  urging  him  to  his  task,  may  be  many 
and  various,  but  usually  tending  towards  Beauty  in  one 
of  its  many  manifestations.  Even  the  fiercest  caricature 
may  arise  from  a  love  of  Beauty  finding  its  expression  in 
a  hatred  of  ugliness. 

The  artist  may  be  narrow  in  his  range  of  ideas  and 
the  scope  of  his  appreciations  in  Nature,  or  may  be  so 
specialized  in  his  craft  as  to  be  limited  by  it ;  or  even  so 
skilful  in  it  as  to  remain  content  with  the  repetition  of  a 
performance  in  which  he  can  be  assured  of  success. 

The  spectator,  on  the  other  hand,  is  frequently  narrow 
in  the  range  of  his  pictorial  understanding,  while  the 
majority  of  picture  lovers  love  them  primarily  not  as 
pictures,  but  as  pictures  of  or  about  something,  which 
recognized  something  it  is  that  gives  rise  to  the  pleasure 
of  the  spectator. 

The  love  of  pictures  for  their  own  sake  is  comparatively 
rare. 

This  may  be  exemplified  easily  enough  by  an  examina- 
tion of  what  is  thought  most  likely  to  appeal  to  popular 
taste,  as  exemplified  in  the  covers  of  the  magazines, 
novel  jackets,  posters  and  advertisements  of  commodities 
of  all  kinds.  As  a  subject  a  pretty  girl  wins  hands  down 
all  the  time  and  all  along  the  line.  A  pretty  girl  with  a 
dog,  a  pretty  girl  with  a  parasol,  a  pretty  girl  in  evening 
dress,  a  pretty  girl  in  a  bathing  dress  or  in  none,  is  made 
to  act  equally  as  a  decoy  for  any  and  everything,  from 
a  tin  of  condensed  milk  to  a  seaside  resort  and  a  bottle 
of  Epsom  salts.  Everybody  loves  pretty  girls,  and  the 
love  of  them  spreads  over  into  a  love  of  pictures  of  them. 

This  example  is  chosen  in  order  to  explain  in  an  obvious 


THE  PURSUIT  OF  BEAUTY  173 

way  the  difference  that  exists  between  the  two  forms  of 
appreciation  of  a  work  of  art,  either  primarily  for  some- 
thing extraneous  to  itself,  or  primarily  for  itself  alone. 

Love,  of  course,  is  like  that,  and  it  is  natural  to  an 
artist  to  prefer  that  his  art  should  be  loved  for  itself 
alone,  like  a  jealous  heiress  who  is  afraid  it  is  not  her 
beautiful  eyes  and  soul  quite  so  much  as  her  money-bags 
that  have  proved  the  attraction. 

The  honest  public  is  quite  puzzled  that  artists  appear 
to  take  such  small  stock  in  many  works  that  are  "  per- 
fectly sweet  "  to  its  own  palate. 

The  fact  is  that  these  works  may  be  not  only  not 
pleasing  to  the  artistic  taste,  and  therefore  negative  and 
negligible,  but  are  often  actively  displeasing.  A  picture 
of  a  pretty  girl,  no  matter  how  pretty  the  face,  may  be 
a  denial  of  beauty,  and  so,  actively,  an  ugly  picture. 

"  The  Beautiful  is  hard  "  according  to  Aristotle;  but 
while  the  mistake  is  frequently  made  of  confounding 
prettiness  with  Beauty — they  have  little  or  nothing  in 
common — "  prettiness  "  is  the  easiest  thing  in  the  world. 
The  prettiness  here  in  mind  is  the  prettiness  of  blanc- 
mange, of  pink  wall-papers,  of  sentimental  tunes,  of 
view-painted  clocks,  of  cochineal,  of  unreserved  cheap 
scents,  powder  puffs,  rouge  and  lip  sticks — in  short,  it 
comes  to  one  word,  "  flagrance  "  ;  or  to  another,  "  cheap- 
ness"; or  to  another,  "commonness";  or  to  another, 
"  speciousness " ;  or  to  another  and  last  word, 
"  vulgarity." 

Of  all  these  "  speciousness "  is  perhaps  the  most 
damning.  "  Falsity  "  in  art  is  to  be  shunned  like  the 
plague. 

"  Prettification,"  in  the  mistaken  idea  that  in  that 
direction  Beauty  lies,  is  the  first  step  along  the  downward 


174  LINE 

path  in  Art.  A  little  to  begin  with,  then  a  little  more, 
then  excess ;  like  a  girl  with  a  rouge  pot,  a  dram  drinker 
or  a  dope  fiend — all  the  true  austerity  of  Beauty  is  lost. 

This  applies  only  to  prettiness  where  it  masquerades 
as  a  form  of  reality,  and  where  its  unreality  is  not  felt, 
in  consequence  of  a  flaw  in  the  mind  of  the  producer  or 
spectator.  There  is  no  more  depressing  sight  than  a 
badly  powdered  and  painted  harridan  in  an  opaque 
heliotrope  complexion,  and  all  the  colours  of  the  spring 
without  the  line,  where  it  is  to  be  supposed  that  the  bloom 
is  intended  to  be  taken  as  the  bloom  of  youth  itself.  The 
fib  makes  too  great  a  demand  upon  our  politeness,  and 
we  feel  awkward,  as  being  accessory  to  a  falseness.  Age 
is  rendered  absurd,  and  its  absurdity  hurts  our  sym- 
pathetic inclination.  Where  reality  is  not  implied  and 
acquiescence  in  the  fib  is  not  demanded,  where  the 
affectation  is  perfectly  frank,  we  have  quite  an  amusing 
form  of  Art ;  and  it  is  not  easy  to  see  why,  if  a  lady  had 
good  reason  to  be  dissatisfied  with  the  colour  of  her  hair, 
she  should  not  have  it  dyed  emerald  green,  if  it  so  pleased 
her ;  or  why  elderly  gentlemen  with  a  nice  taste  for  colour 
and  form  should  not  have  their  wigs  made  purple,  and 
crested  like  a  peacock.  In  such  a  case,  our  acquiescence 
would  be  complete,  and  we  should  not  hesitate  to  praise 
the  charm  of  the  result,  where  now  we  are  compelled  to 
keep  silence  on  the  subject  of  hairdressers. 

A  lie  is  a  lie,  or  a  fib  is  a  fib,  only  where  acquiescence  is 
expected,  where  it  is  intended  that  the  hearer  should  be 
deceived  and  "  taken  in."  The  risk  of  "  prettification  " 
is  that  the  artist  may  take  himself  in  by  it  as  much  as  the 
public.  If  he  begins  fibbing  to  himself,  he  may  end  by 
lying  outright  to  all  the  world. 

Sincerity  is  therefore  one  of  the  first  requisites  in  Art, 


THE   PURSUIT   OF   BEAUTY  175 

never  to  be  lost  hold  of;  but  Sincerity  is  not  to  be 
regarded  as  a  synonym  for  dullness  or  excessive  Puri- 
tanism ;  still  less  for  Pomposity.  Cheerfulness  may  well 
break  in.  The  most  religious  people  are  often  the  gayest 
and  most  amusing. 

The  desire  to  represent  external  objects,  to  imitate 
with  a  near  or  far  approach  to  actual  reproduction,  is 
the  simplest  aim  and  form  of  Art. 

Pleasure  is  taken  in  this,  both  in  the  making  and  in  the 
contemplation  of  the  result,  for  what  reason  is  not  yet 
cleared  up,  even  after  all  that  has  been  written  upon  Art 
and  ^Esthetics. 

The  reason  remains  as  obscure  as  that  which  makes  us 
prefer  toffee  and  jam,  let  us  say,  to  Turkey  rhubarb,  even 
in  the  minutest  quantity,  and  no  matter  how  urgently  this 
may  be  called  for  by  our  condition.  A  healthy  palate  will 
choose  what  is  best  for  it,  being  en  rapport  with  the  rest 
of  the  body. 

It  is  to  be  imagined  that  lack  of  skill  alone,  in  the  early 
stages  of  the  artist's  progress,  restrains  him  from  exacti- 
tude and  fullness  of  imitation.  He  would  probably,  if 
he  could,  take  photographs  in  bronze,  and  colour  them 
in  everlasting  paint  so  to  resemble  life  that  it  might  be 
mistaken  for  it — even  to  pray  the  Gods  to  endow  the  work 
with  life  and  movement,  as  did  Pygmalion. 

The  "  Sleeping  Beauty  "  at  Madame  Tussaud's  remains 
to  the  yokel  mind  the  last  word  of  wonder.  Not  alone 
the  waxen  beauty  of  the  complexion,  but  the  mechanism, 
pneumatic  or  other,  that  heaves  the  bosom  from  morning 
to  night  during  opening  hours  with  a  perpetuation  from 
year  to  year  equal  to  the  blush — each  affords  an  equal 
satisfaction  to  his  aesthetic  appetite. 


176  LINE 

The  yokel  is  our  nearest  approach  to  the  savage  state 
here  in  England.  Yet  most  of  us  carry  a  yokel  somewhere 
concealed  within  us,  no  matter  how  deeply  we  have 
managed  to  bury  him. 

In  country  places  a  tomato  or  a  carrot,  or  a  "  forked 
radish  fantastically  carved,"  resembling  a  man  or  woman, 
will  be  passed  from  hand  to  hand  and  be  for  the  time  it 
lasts  the  wonder  of  the  village  community.  The  mandrake 
that  is  said  to  resemble  a  baby,  and  is  fabled  to  scream 
like  a  lost  soul  as  it  is  torn  from  earth,  belongs  to  this 
order.  Fancied  resemblances  in  rocks  or  trees  to  men, 
to  animals,  or  to  other  things  not  themselves  give  rise  to 
a  peculiar  pleasure,  even  when  it  appears  that  Nature 
herself  has  been  the  artist,  without  assistance  from  the 
hand  of  man.  "  Castles  in  the  clouds  " — who  has  not 
seen  them  built  and  unbuilt  out  of  that  flimsy  material  ? 
What  child  has  not  commanded  those  troops  that  ride 
by,  and  watched  his  full-sailed  navies  sweep  across  blue, 
suspended  seas,  to  vanish  or  founder  like  the  realities  they 
suggest  ? 

Is  it  because  a  picture — indeed  any  work  of  art,  whether 
a  statue,  a  play,  a  song,  or  a  story — offers  a  way  of  escape 
into  other  surroundings  not  our  present — into  a  timeless 
other  place — a  cheap  transit  to  foreign  parts,  an  excursion 
to  the  moon  without  payment  to  go,  without  baggage, 
pain,  trouble  or  seasickness  in  the  going,  and  without 
heartsickness  in  the  home-coming  to  reality  that  lies  at 
the  root  of  our  pleasure  ? 

Is  it  all  really  a  wool-gathering,  a  tale  of  home  to  a  home- 
sick mind  ? — at  its  best  the  vision  of  an  inn  such  as  a  tramp 
might  dream  as  he  lies  soaking  and  penniless  in  the  ditch 
by  the  hedge  ? 

We  are  not  content,  and  it  is  a  beguilement  with  news 


THE  PURSUIT  OF  BEAUTY  177 

of  elsewhere  than  where  we  are.  We  are  at  home,  and 
we  wish  to  be  abroad.  Our  sordid  life  is  not  our  true 
reality,  and  we  wish  for  the  dream  to  come  true ;  or,  life 
is  too  real,  and  we  wish  to  escape  into  a  land  of  enchant- 
ment where  the  roads  are  swept  and  policed  for  us  by  a 
witch's  broom  and  a  wizard's  wand. 

It  is  something  of  this  kind  that  lies  at  the  root  of  our 
love  of  resemblances,  which  are  nothing  but  reminders 
of  something  we  are  interested  in.  While  the  beloved 
is  with  us  we  have  no  need  of  a  portrait.  Yet  would  not 
Michael  Angelo  have  carried  a  carte-de-visite  size  photo- 
graph of  Vittoria  Colonna  in  his  breast  pocket  ? — or  Dante 
one  of  'Trice,  rather  than  a  perfect  work  of  art  ?  Would 
not  Ulysses  in  his  wanderings  have  frayed  and  worn  out 
a  penny  picture-postcard  of  Ithaca  ?  The  lover  is  anxious 
for  every  particular,  but  we  would  have  the  artist's 
summary  and  emphasis. 

These  responses  to  our  desires,  direct  or  indirect,  as 
they  answer  our  longings,  or  seduce  us  from  the  present, 
are  surely  the  basis  of  our  love  of  Art,  the  meat  for  our 
hunger.  Yet  the  delicate  flavours,  the  sweets,  the  sours 
and  savouries,  the  caviare,  the  Amontillado,  the  peaches, 
the  fine  things  of  the  palate,  that  carry  hints  of  memory 
and  vague  hopes  here  into  the  present — tales  of  countries 
unexplored,  unthought-of  even — these  also  come  in  to 
satisfy  something  more  than  simple  hunger. 

It  seems  to  sort  itself  out  to  this — that  Art  is  a  form,  of 
altruism.  Our  bodies  seem  to  be  transported  by  an  appear- 
ance away  from  the  present  in  time  or  place,  or  our  minds 
are  placed,  by  a  willing  submission  or  surrender,  under  the 
will  of  another,  accompanying  them  upon  the  road  they  go, 
like  Ruth  with  Naomi.  As  though  for  a  short  time  we  said, 
"  Thy  people  shall  be  my  people,  and  thy  god  my  god." 


178  LINE 

It  is  the  skill  with  which  this  submission  and  surrender 
to  self-forgetfulness  is  attained  either  by  the  presentation 
of  the  loved  thing — the  actual  girl  or  the  house  which  is 
the  home  we  left  behind,  or  the  golden  girl,  Cote  d'Or,  or 
Eldorado  we  set  out  to  seek — the  Paradise  we  have 
left  or  go  in  search  of,  or  simple  companionship  on  a 
road  we  ourselves  must  go,  that  decides  our  opinion 
of  the  work,  its  success  or  failure  with  us  as  creators  or 
spectators. 

It  might  be  objected  that  the  ironic  presentation  of 
things  as  they  are,  in  the  spirit  of  Voltaire's  Candide, 
or  of  Thomas  Hardy's  Return  of  the  Native,  of  Hogarth, 
Daumier,  Degas,  Forain,  and  the  whole  race  of  carica- 
turists, is  against  this  view — that  Rembrandt  himself 
presents  no  golden  girl,  no  Eldorado,  but  rather  the  out- 
cast from  Paradise,  the  homeless  and  disinherited. 

Yet  still  the  argument  holds.  All  these  are  akin ;  for 
though  the  appeal  of  the  work  be  less  personal,  less  enter- 
taining, less  direct  to  our  desires,  it  is  made  through  our 
sense  of  the  lot  we  have  in  common  with  all  mankind. 
Not  our  love,  perhaps,  but  our  pity,  which  is  proverbially 
akin,  is  involved.  Hardship,  injustice,  all  the  sorrow  of 
life,  what  does  our  recognition  of  these  imply  but  a  sense 
of  something  lost — not  a  denial  of  the  existence  of 
Eldorado,  but  an  emphatic  recognition  of  it,  though  else- 
where than  here  and  now?  Art,  then,  becomes  the 
comforter  of  our  pilgrimage,  a  sharer  in  it,  where  a  tale 
of  far-away  home  or  heaven  might  seem  too  like  a 
mockery  of  our  footsoreness.  What  use  to  talk  of  golden 
slippers  to  a  man  on  the  march,  with  a  blistered  heel? 
It  is  then  that  a  sense  of  fellowship  in  suffering  makes 
the  march  easier  for  most,  if  not  for  all. 

Art  is  indeed  in  this  view  nothing  but  an  expression 


ARTISTIC  "PROPERTIES"  179 

of  our  home-sickness — of  a  divine  nostalgia,  shown  in 
our  pity  for  things  as  they  are  and  a  regret  for  them  as 
they  might  be. 

Portraiture,  it  is  true,  demands  sometimes  a  stiff  diges- 
tion, where  "  likeness  "  is  all  that  the  artist  gives  us;  as 
of  the  fat  Lord  Mayor,  who  has  come  into  his  Paradise 
here  and  now,  and  can  be  seen  in  chubby  enjoyment  of 
it.  He  has  found  the  Eldorado  for  which  he  sighed,  and 
here  is  the  picture  of  a  contented  man — no  nostalgia  here, 
a  clothed  body  but  a  naked  soul — Nunc  dimittis — his  is 
the  work  of  art;  he  commissioned  it  and  set  the  subject, 
and  wrought  through  the  craftsman's  hand,  and  this  is 
the  material  expression  of  his  material  ideal — Himself. 
He  has  regained  his  Paradise,  and  here  he  is  seen,  immor- 
talized, actually  sitting  in  it. 

To  the  spiritually  hungry  an  effect  may  be  produced 
akin  to  that  upon  the  body  by  feasting  seen  through 
lighted  windows,  or  by  the  music  that  mocked  and 
emphasized  the  loneliness  of  Henley  as  he  passed  along  the 
street.  At  best,  the  Mayor  may  bore  him. 

This  is  one  of  life's  little  ironies.  Few  people  in  these 
degenerate  days  are  found  to  pray — 

"  God  bless  the  Squire  and  his  relations, 
And  keep  us  in  our  proper  stations." 

But  this  was  never  really  a  folk-song,  or  true  poetry 
in  spite  of  the  rhyme ;  and  so  with  the  portrait. 


A  rtistic   ' '  Properties . ' ' 

Art  casts  a  wide  net ;  and  we  come  to  a  brief  considera- 
tion of  what  means  are  best  to  be  employed  in  accordance 
with  what  fish  it  is  proposed  to  catch. 


l8o  LINE 

If  a  space  be  given,  the  purpose  of  that  space  will  be 
the  first  factor  dictating  treatment;  as,  whether  it  be  a 
fixed  space,  as  a  wall,  or  a  movable  one,  as  a  book  or 
easel  picture. 

In  the  case  of  the  fixed  space  the  design  should  be  made 
with  due  regard  to  the  lighting. 

The  size  and  position  of  the  given  space  will  dictate 
the  scale  of  the  composition,  and  its  surroundings  will 
largely  determine  the  style  of  treatment  to  be  employed. 

Nothing  is  more  irritating  than  an  affectation  of  an 
unfelt  archaism,  professing  more  or  less  learnedly  to  har- 
monize with  an  ancient  building,  or  than  a  self-satisfied 
application  of  a  fashionable  and  independent  modernism. 
Witness  the  effects  of  certain  Gothic  revivalists,  and  of 
the  introduction  of  the  pseudo-classic  white  marble  wall- 
slabs  of  Flaxman's  time  into  our  village  churches,  or  the 
statues  of  Canning,  Disraeli  and  others  into  Westminster 
Abbey  in  more  recent  years.  The  spirit  of  place  and  time 
must  have  a  large  say  in  the  matter,  and  any  aggressive 
or  unscholarly  display  of  personality  at  the  expense  of 
its  surroundings,  unless  steeped  in  this  spirit,  no  matter 
how  permissible  or  admirable  elsewhere,  will  be  a  vulgarity, 
a  display  of  artistic  ill  manners. 

A  wall  should  remain  a  wall,  however  treated,  and 
no  effort,  or  apparent  effort,  be  made  to  make  it  appear 
other  than  what  it  is.  Is  it  not,  therefore,  to  be  used  for 
a  display  of  the  artist's  powers  of  realistic  representation, 
but  all  should  be  kept,  no  matter  what  amount  of  modelling 
or  light  and  shade  be  used,  well  inside  the  scope  of  the 
conventions  of  decorative  art.  The  presence  of  the  wall 
as  a  wall  must  not  be  lost  sight  of — it  should  not  be 
camouflaged  into  a  doorway  or  into  a  projection. 

In  the  case  of  a  book-page,  or  of  an  easel  picture,  the 


ARTISTIC    "  PROPERTIES  "  l8l 

restrictions  are  generally  less  severe,  though  even  here 
a  willing  submission  to  the  limitation  imposed  by  the 
means  used  is  a  sign  not  of  a  slave,  but  of  a  master  of  his 
craft. 

The  finer  the  mind  the  more  selective  it  will  generally 
prove,  searching  rather  than  to  put  in  all,  to  leave  out  all 
but  the  essential  to  the  purpose  in  view. 

In  the  case  of  a  book,  the  style  and  period  of  the  writer 
will  dictate  to-  the  artist  to  much  the  same  extent  as  will 
the  style  and  period  of  a  building.  The  purpose  of  the 
book,  its  size,  and  the  "  make-up  "  as  regards  paper  and 
type  must  all  be  kept  in  view. 

Flat  pattern  alone  will  suffice  for  the  illustration  of 
certain  forms  of  thought,  but  it  is  painful  to  see  the  effort 
made  to  force  a  style  based,  let  us  say  on  Beardsley's, 
upon  a  subject  it  is  entirely  incapable  of  expressing.  A 
sincere  admiration  of  Beardsley's  art  and  the  novels  of 
Charles  Dickens  is  doubtless  entirely  compatible,  but  any 
effort  made  to  illustrate  Dickens  by  the  employment  of 
abstractions  of  pattern  alone  is  to  reduce  Art  to  an 
absurdity.  Solidity  of  form  and  as  forcible  a  presentation 
of  character  as  possible  should  be  the  aim,  even  leaning 
somewhat  towards  caricature  rather  than  to  any  suppres- 
sion of  reality  as  the  artist  sees  it. 

The  easel  picture  may  range  from  the  entirely  decora- 
tive and  conventionalized  pattern,  even  to  the  deceptively 
realistic,  or,  as  in  recent  years,  may  be  made  the  vehicle 
for  the  expression  of  the  most  abstruse  and  abstract 
ideas  of  form,  line  and  colour.  It  may  be  static,  or 
endeavour  to  cross  the  border-line  of  time,  to  dismiss  the 
arbitration  of  the  clock,  and  deal  with  movement  itself  as 
the  prime  motive  of  its  composition.  To  what  develop- 
ments this  may  lead  it  is  hard  to  say,  but  there  are  signs 


l82  LINE 

that,  at  any  rate  in   some  quarters,  this  effort  has  for 
the  time  being  exhausted  itself. 

Cubism,  vorticism  and  other  movements  contain  ele- 
ments and  ideas  with  which  the  author  is  insufficiently 
acquainted  to  analyse  or  expound,  not  from  lack  of 
sympathy  with  them,  but  out  of  pure  ignorance,  and 
perhaps  an  indolent  habit  of  mind  which  has  allowed  him 
to  retain  his  ignorance  in  contentment. 

In  so  far  as  they  aim  at  freeing  Art  from  its  bondage 
to  a  merely  reproductive  or  imitative  function,  and  in  so 
far  as  they  have  achieved  this  aim,  they  have  clarified 
matters;  but  it  is  to  be  feared  that  this  clarification  is 
more  than  counterbalanced  by  the  amount  of  confusion 
they  have  wrought  in  other  directions. 

To  aim  at  achieving  Beauty  by  the  simple  expedient  of 
drawing  only  obviously  beautiful  things  or  people  is  a 
mark  of  a  commonness  of  mind  that  decks  itself  up  in  a 
beauty  not  its  own,  as  in  a  second-hand  suit  of  finery 
that  has  seen  better  days. 

Nothing  is  more  beautiful  than  flowers,  and  nothing 
simpler  and  easier  than  to  paint  them— "in  a  way." 
But  is  there  a  painted  flower  picture  in  the  world  that 
can  compete  in  beauty  with  the  vision  of  an  old  woman's 
wrinkles  as  etched  in  colourless  line  by  Rembrandt  ? 

Again,  a  work  that  depends  for  its  interest  upon  its 
repetition  of  another  art,  without  recreating  it,  as  in 
the  case  of  the  bulk  of  architectural  drawings,  can 
only  take  a  low  rank  in  the  scale  of  artistic  expression. 
Where  these  are  fiercely  and  imaginatively  dealt  with, 
as  in  Piranesi's  "  Carceri,"  or  where  they  form  the  basis 
of  a  design  whose  stylism  acts  like  a  pillow  to  contempla- 
tion, as  in  Cotman's  large  vision,  the  artist  makes  good 
his  claim  to  the  material  of  his  choice;  but  most  often 


ARTISTIC    "  PROPERTIES  "  183 

the  subject  is  greater  than  the  artist,  and  we  are  inclined 
to  wish  that  he  had  let  it  alone. 

Much  the  same  applies  to  such  pictures  as  depend  for 
their  interest,  not  on  any  quality  of  vision  on  the  part  of 
the  artist,  but  upon  the  quality  and  kind  of  studio  proper- 
ties he  may  possess — furniture,  costumes,  armour,  china 
and  the  like.  The  beauty  of  these  things  belongs  to 
themselves  and  to  their  creator.  They  are  in  themselves 
finished  works  of  art,  and  the  building  up  of  a  picture 
from  such  material,  no  matter  how  beautiful  the  material 
may  be  in  itself,  and  no  matter  how  it  may  exhibit  the 
connoisseurship  of  the  artist  as  collector  and  antiquarian, 
is  apt  rather  to  show  his  artistic  mentality  in  but  a  poor 
light.  The  copying  of  such  objects  is  so  simple  an  affair 
that  it  frequently  is  but  one  remove,  from  copying 
another  man's  picture  and  calling  it  one's  own. 

Rembrandt  loved  these  things,  but  they  never  took 
precedence  of  his  love  of  humanity. 

Watteau  used  them  to  take  us  to  a  world  just  outside 
our  own — a  world  of  as  delicate  a  charm  as  the  gardens 
of  the  Abbey  of  Theleme — the  Abbey  of  heart's  desire, 
whose  motto  was  "  Fay  ce  que  voudras."  In  Watteau's 
world  hear  Monsieur  Bon  Mot  accusing  Madame  Bon 
Bon  of  having  a  heart  made  of  chocolate,  and  her  retort 
that  his  brain  was  composed  of  a  cracker  motto,  and  a 
chorus  of  regrets  from  the  ladies  on  the  expensiveness  of 
a  shepherdess's  life  in  brocades  and  flowers.  But  how 
well  worth  the  expense !  And  how  all  these  costumes 
became  them  "  in  that  station  of  life  to  which  it  pleased 
Watteau  to  call  them  "  out  of  the  inane — so  delicately 
real,  so  delicately  unreal  in  that  glimmering  twilight  of 
the  silken  world  of  his  creation.  These  fripperies  were 
but  an  attribute,  not  the  basis,  of  his  charm. 


184  LINE 

Too  often  such  pictures  are  mere  shops  of  spurious 
"  curios  " — spurios  is  a  good  "  portmanteau  "  for 
them — "specimen  rooms"  of  "period"  furniture  lucky 
if  no  error  of  style  crops  up  in  them;  "still  life," 
or,  as  the  French  expresses  it  better,  "  Nature  morte," 
dead  stuff.  As  Blake  said,  "  A  fool  can  do  this,  as  it  is 
the  work  of  no  mind." 


XV 

CONCLUSION  IN  PLASTER 

YESTERDAY  was  the  last  of  the  College  year.  One 
of  the  Art  masters  had  given  reminiscences  of  Watts,  of 
Whistler,  of  Phil  May — three  artists  who  between  them  had 
covered  so  wide  a  range  of  Life  and  of  Art,  who  had  lived 
and  worked  with  such  different  aims  and  in  such  different 
ways — one  to  a  great  age,  one  to  be  old,  and  the  other 
barely  to  the  middle  of  the  allotted  span — yet  all  died  in 
the  same  year,  the  high,  serious  mind,  the  wit  and  the 
humorist  alike.  Useful  illustrations  of  the  inclusiveness 
of  Art !  The  master  had  known  them  all,  and  had  admired 
them  all  "this  side  idolatry";  they  had  been  almost 
the  gods  of  his  boyhood  and  young  manhood,  which  didn't 
after  all  seem  so  very  far  behind  him.  He  suddenly 
realized  that  he  was  speaking  to  a  generation  that  had 
sprung  up  to  whom  the  names  so  familiar  to  him  were 
but  names  of  lives  remote — that  he  was  telling  of  a  vanished 
time  which  to  these  youngsters  was  as  ancient  as  the  history 
of  Greece  and  Rome,  out  of  which  he,  like  a  newly-dis- 
covered gramophone  of  the  period,  had,  by  the  chance 
touch  of  a  spring,  been  set  going,  so  that  they  heard  in 
the  present  a  voice  speaking  out  of  a  dead  past. 

The  distant  years  get  telescoped  together  for  the 
young,  and  years  that  to  middle  age  seem  but  yester- 
day, are  for  them  beyond  the  horizon.  To  them 
"  Victorian "  has  no  qualifications  such  as  "  early," 
"  mid  "  and  "  late."  A  decade  or  two  in  that  direction 
makes  no  difference.  All  is  at  the  vanishing  line.  It  is 


Severe  use  of  line  for  the  expression  of  form,  with  the  endeavour  to 
maintain  the  same  severity  throughout,  both  in  local  colour  and  shade. 


186 


CONCLUSION   IN   PLASTER  187 

the  nearest — past  and  future — the  foreground,  in  fact, 
that  takes  up  so  much  room  in  the  perspective  of  time. 
At  twenty,  thirty  years  ago  is  a  lifetime  and  a  half.  Never- 
theless, from  a  very  young  student  the  question,  "  What 
was  Turner  like?  "  and  "Did  you  know  Constable?  " 
came  on  him  as  something  like  a  revelation.  If  it  had 
been  ridicule  he  could  have  held  his  own;  but  it  was 
Innocence  at  large  with  something  too  uncommonly 
like  reverence  for  an  age  of  which  he  couldn't  boast. 

It  was  as  though,  when  thinking  it  is  still  early,  a  clock, 
even  though  it  be  an  hour  too  fast,  strikes  a  sudden 
reminder  that  it  is  later  than  we  thought. 

Leaving  the  illuminated  "  Life  "  room,  he  took  the 
short  cut  through  the  "  Antique,"  now  deserted  in  the 
summer  twilight. 

There  was  the  fresh,  clean  smell  of  pine  and  deal — the 
new  "  donkeys  "  had  just  been  delivered.  He  took  a 
deep  breath  of  it  with  all  the  other  familiar  faint  scents 
of  cut  cedar  pencils,  paint,  turpentine  and  drawing  boards 
that  predominate  so  pleasantly  in  a  School  of  Art.  He 
had  known  them  all  his  life.  Why  should  they  strike 
him  all  afresh  to-night? 

In  the  twilight  there  stood  the  clapping  Faun ;  he  had 
done  his  stippled  drawing  of  that,  and  anatomized  it 
when  he  tried  for  the  R.A.  probationership.  There  was 
the  slave  of  Michel  Angelo ;  he  had  painted  that  in  mono- 
chrome— had  even  got  a  prize  for  it.  There  was  the 
Discobolus ;  in  that  he  had  passed  the  memory  examina- 
tion. It  was  so  familiar  that  he  had  almost  forgotten  it. 
"  O,  W  X  Y  Z,  you  had  clean  gone  out  of  my  head, 
Darling  Mr.  Discobolus  !  "  he  misquoted. 

Someone  had  placed  a  small  school  study  in  modelling 
from  the  life  between  the  knees  of  the  great  broken  Torso 


188  LINE 

of  Herakles.  How  powerful  it  looked — greater,  more 
titanic  in  its  sweep  of  line  than  ever  for  the  contrast  with 
the  small  and  precise  realism  of  the  student.  He  had 
always  thought  it  fine — somehow  to-night  it  was  finer. 
Yet  these  were  but  the  hackneyed  old  masterpieces,  the 
chopping-blocks  for  beginners  hi  Art.  By  the  door  through 
which  he  was  about  to  pass  glimmered  the  great  Aphrodite 
of  Melos.  Hackneyed?  Of  course — most  hackneyed  of 
all.  But  some  things — some  truths — never  become 
platitudes.  He  paused  and  stepped  back.  Here,  in 
this  deserted  twilight,  he  looked  at  her  anew,  as  he  had 
not  looked  at  her  for  years. 

He  was  caught  and  held  back  by  her  in  that  momen- 
tarily receptive  mood  that  comes  at  the  end  of  a  job 
accomplished.  How  often  he  had  hurried  by,  always,  it 
is  true,  with  reverence,  but  with  that  absurd  sense  of 
something  more  pressing  to  attend  to.  All  the  little 
things — requisition  forms  for  rags,  for  paper,  for  press 
black,  for  middle  varnish — Aphrodite  could  wait.  But  to- 
night, there  was  nothing — his  job  was  done,  and  there  was 
no  hurry.  She  showed  none — it  was  part  of  her  dignity. 

Everything  fell  away  from  him  into  a  dim  background, 
until  the  twilight  held  nothing  but  these  two — the  glim- 
mering presentation  of  Aphrodite  and  the  grey  man. 
Art  and  the  artist  confronted  each  other.  To  him  it 
seemed  not  so  much  that  he  but  that  she  was  the  living 
and  active  force. 

Once  before,  in  the  Louvre,  he  had  experienced  some- 
thing of  the  same  exaltation,  but  with  a  difference.  Then 
he  had  heard  the  blow  of  the  mallet  and  the  chipping  of 
the  punch.  It  was  the  sculptor  rather  than  the  Goddess 
who  had  come  alive,  just  as  it  was  always  Velasquez 
rather  than  Philip  who  lived  upon  the  canvas  in  the 


CONCLUSION   IN   PLASTER  189 

National  Gallery.  Ah,  yes — technique — technique — at 
its  highest  self-sacrifice  and  discipline  in  the  aristocratic 
suppression  of  display ;  this  he  knew.  But  to-night  it  was 
the  Goddess  of  Beauty  herself  who  appeared,  looking 
across  two  thousand  years  and  more,  not  dead,  but  living 
— not  still  living  only,  but  eternal. 

Nor  was  she  born  only  of  the  mallet  and  punch  that 
wrought  her,  that  he  had  heard  chipping  in  the  Louvre. 

Her  origin  is  before  Eve,  before  Lilith,  before  Pandora. 

The  exaltation  passed.  He  knew  well  enough  that  this 
is  but  a  manifest  of  her  who  is  in  the  brains  and  hearts 
of  all  men.  Eternal  Beauty,  eternal  calm,  eternal  rest 
for  the  tired  spirit,  the  fulfilment  of  all  desires,  the  great 
Ideal  here  realized  as  far  as  may  be  on  this  earth.  Here 
is  the  summary  of  all  that  went  before,  the  completion 
of  the  strivings  of  the  little  men  like  him  who  each  had 
struggled  forward,  adding  their  contribution  to  the  sum 
of  thought,  of  knowledge,  of  worship  and  of  skill.  The 
chisel  he  had  heard  in  the  Louvre  was  the  spearhead 
of  the  phalanx  of  dead  men  behind  the  sculptor.  Our  Lady 
of  Melos — Eternal  Mother — Goddess,  not  of  Passion,  cruel 
and  blind,  but  of  Beauty  and  of  Love,  which  sees,  and 
understands,  and  forgives — eternal  solace  of  mankind — 
was  she  not  too  a  revelation  as  divine  as  that  bestowed 
upon  the  prophets  of  the  vindictive  and  terrible  Jehovah 
of  old  ?  A  revelation,  not  in  a  dialect  of  Babel,  but  in 
the  unchanging  and  timeless  language  of  perfect  form, 
speaking  the  tongue  that  needs  no  translation,  being 
understood  of  all  nations,  through  all  ages,  by  literate 
and  illiterate  alike.  Pagan?  Pan  and  the  death  of  the 
gods?  He  didn't  understand.  The  thought  seemed 
stupid.  Here,  at  least,  one  Goddess  was  alive.  The 
Hebrew,  the  Greek  and  the  Latin  tongues  were  dead.  But 


190  LINE 

Form  survived  for  all  to  see.  All  Beauty  was  Revelation ; 
and  Form  the  god-like  language  of  it,  since  it  speaks  to 
all.  There  is  no  dispute  nor  argument.  Beauty  does 
not,  cannot,  lie,  for  untruth  is  ugly.  The  Goddess  of 
Beauty  is  Goddess  also  of  Truth 

The  twilight  deepened.  The  model  had  got  into  his 
clothes,  and  came  through  the  Antique  room.  His  teeth 
flashed  out  of  the  gloom.  "  Good-night,  sare."  "  Good- 
night, Antonio."  Just  so  would  the  clapping  Faun  have 
looked  in  trousers  and  a  bowler  hat.  How  those  Italians 
took  the  starch  out  of  a  London  bowler  was  a  miracle  ! 

A  jazz  tune  struck  up  in  the  students'  common  room; 
they  were  dancing.  The  masters  broke  up  and  away. 

"  Good-night,  Marriott.  Good-night,  Buckman.  Good- 
night, Fenn.  Good -night,  Bentley.  Good -night, 
Gardiner." 

Darkness  fell,  enwrapping  the  tired  slave,  the  tireless 
Faun,  and  the  Goddess  alike,  with  the  secret  of  that 
ghostly  interchange  the  words  of  which  no  listener  has 
caught ;  only  the  carven  groan  of  the  slave,  the  chuckle 
of  the  Faun,  and  Beauty's  self  filling  the  silence  with  the 
throb  of  Life. 

With  what  strange  activities  the  mind  can  animate 
inert  matter — were  they  nothing  but  plaster  ? 

No — they,  and  all  Art,  are  alive,  and  lifegiving. 

Next  day  the  school  would  be  empty  of  all  life  but  this — 
this  and  the  charwomen  and  the  caretakers — and  the 
master  went  out,  feeling  a  little  like  a  priest  according 
to  the  order  of  Aphrodite. 

At  least  he  had  seen  the  Goddess. 

"  After  all,  Art  is  worth  while,"  he  said,  as  he  boarded 
the  tram  for  the  "  Elephant" — "  in  spite  of  the  artists' 
absurdity." 


A  SELECTION  FROM 
CHAPMAN  &  HALL'S 
LIST  OF  ART  BOOKS 


LONDON :  CHAPMAN  &•  HALL,  LTD. 
ii   HENRIETTA   STREET,  W.C.2 


HOW  TO  DRAW  IN  PEN 
AND  INK 

By  HARRY  FURNISS.  Illustrated. 
Demy  8vo,  45.  6d.  net. 

MORE  ABOUT  HOW  TO  DRAW 
IN  PEN  AND  INK 

By  HARRY  FURNISS.  With  numerous 
illustrations.  Demy  8vo,  45.  6d.  net. 

THE  CRAFTSMAN'S  PLANT 
BOOK 

By  RICHARD  G.  HATTON,  Professor 
of  Fine  Art,  University  of  Durham,  Hon. 
A.R.C.A.  (Lond.).  With  numerous  illustra- 
tions in  colour  and  black  and  white.  Imp. 
8vo,  303.  net. 

PERSPECTIVE  FOR  ART 
STUDENTS,  ARTISTS  AND 
DRAUGHTSMEN 

By  RICHARD  G.  HATTON.  New  and 
revised  edition.  Cr.  8vo,  6s.  net. 

FIGURE  DRAWING 

By   RICHARD    G.   HATTON.       With 

nearly  400  diagrams.  Demy  8vo,  ics.  6d. 
net. 


FIGURE  COMPOSITION 

By  RICHARD  G.  HATTON.  With 
numerous  illustrations.  DemySvo,  los.  6d. 
net. 

DESIGN 

By  RICHARD  G.  HATTON.  With  177 
illustrations.  Demy  8vo,  73.  6d.  net. 


UNIVERSAL  ART  SERIES 

Edited  by  FREDERICK  MARRIOTT,  Hon.  A.R.C.A. 
(Lond.),  R.B.C.,  A.R.E.  Recognised  Teacher, 
Fine  Art,  University  of  London. 

THE  ART  OF  ILLUSTRATION 

By  E.  J.  SULLIVAN.  Medium  8vo, 
255.  net. 

SCULPTURE  OF  TO-DAY 

By  KINETON  PARKES.  Two  volumes. 
Medium  8vo.  Vol.  I.,  253.  net.  Vol.  II., 
303.  net. 

MODERN  MOVEMENTS  IN 
PAINTING 

By  CHARLES  MARRIOTT.  Medium 
8vo,  2is.  net. 

DESIGN  AND  TRADITION 

By  W.  AMOR  FENN.  Medium  8vo, 
303.  net. 


UNIVERSAL   ART  SERIES 

The  following  volumes  are  in  preparation: — 

LANDSCAPE    PAINTING    FROM 
GIOTTO  TO  THE  PRESENT  DAY 

By    C.    LEWIS    HIND.       In    2    volumes. 
Profusely  illustrated 

MODERN  ARCHITECTURE 

By  CHARLES  MARRIOTT.      With  many 
illustrations  and  plans. 

ETCHING,    AQUATINT,    AND 
MEZZOTINT 

By    ARTHUR     POPHAM.       With    many 
illustrations. 


DECORATIVE  DESIGN 

By  FRANK  G.  JACKSON.  Large  Cr. 
8vo,  95.  6d.  net. 

THEORY  AND  PRACTICE  OF 
DESIGN 

By  FRANK  G.  JACKSON.  With  700 
illustrations.  Large  Cr.  8vo,  us.  net. 

MODELLING:  A  GUIDE  FOR 
TEACHERS  AND  STUDENTS 

By  E.  LANTERI,  Professor  of  Sculpture 
at  the  Royal  College  of  Art,  South  Kensing- 
ton. In  three  volumes.  Cr.  410,  173.  6d. 
net  per  volume. 


STUDIES  IN  PLANT  FORM 
AND  DESIGN 

By  W.  MIDGLEY  and  A.  E.  V.  LILLEY. 

Illustrated.  Revised  and  enlarged.  Demy 
8vo,  75.  6d.  net. 

ANIMALS  IN  MOTION 

By  EADWARD  MUYBRIDGE.  Pro- 
fusely illustrated.  Oblong,  275.  6d.  net. 

HUMAN  FIGURE  IN  MOTION 

By  EADWARD  MUYBRIDGE.  Illus- 
trated. Oblong,  275.  6d.  net. 

FRESCO  PAINTING:    ITS  ART 
AND  TECHNIQUE 

By  JAMES  WARD,  Head  Master  of  the 
Macclesfield  School  of  Art.  Fully  illus- 
trated. Demy  8vo,  123.  6d.  net. 

THE  COLOUR  DECORATION 
OF  ARCHITECTURE 

By  JAMES  WARD.  Illustrated  in  colour 
and  half  tone.  Royal  8vo,  1 1  s.  6d.  net. 

HISTORY  AND  METHODS 
OF  ANCIENT  AND  MODERN 
PAINTING 

By  JAMES  WARD.  In  four  volumes. 
Demy  8vo.  Vol.  I.,  IDS.  net.  Vol.  II., 
los.  net.  Vol.  III.,  155.  net.  Vol.  IV., 
153.  net. 


PROGRESSIVE  DESIGN  FOR 
STUDENTS 

By  JAMES  WARD.     Demy  8vo,  6s.  net. 

HISTORIC  ORNAMENT 

By  JAMES    WARD.      In  two  volumes. 
Demy  8vo,  95.  6d.  net  per  volume. 

COLOUR  HARMONY  AND 
CONTRAST 

By  JAMES   WARD.      With  16  coloured 
illustrations.     Demy  8vo,  ns.6d.net. 

COSTUME  DESIGN  AND 
ILLUSTRATION 

.  By  ETHEL  H.  TRAPHAGEN.  200 
illustrations,  including  several  in  colour. 
Oblong,  173.  6d.  net. 

STUDENT'S  MANUAL  OF 
FASHION  DRAWING 

By  EDITH  YOUNG.     With  30  full-page 
plates.     Oblong,  123.  6d.  net. 


t 


PLEASE  DO  NOT  REMOVE 
CARDS  OR  SLIPS  FROM  THIS  POCKET 

UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO  LIBRARY 


NC 

710 

S85 

1922 

C.I 

ROBA